JP2020058429A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which improves the amusement by suitably executing the advance notice performance.SOLUTION: In a performance example B, by adjusting (changing) the execution ratio of the advance notice performance according to the setting value, at least one of the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice performance is adjusted within the same or substantially same range. With this, the appearance rate and reliability of the advance notice performance can be made to be intended ones, a player can be prevented from being confused by the advance notice performance. Also, the setting value can be prevented from being immoderately suggested with the execution frequency of the advance notice performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60-1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for a player.

  Conventionally, there has been one in which a command for designating a winning determination result indicating a result of the prefetch determination is output from the main side provided with the main substrate to the sub side provided with the effect control substrate. In such a gaming machine, the random number extracted on the main side is used to determine a win / fail result, a big hit type, and a variation pattern, and a command for designating a winning determination result according to the look-ahead determination result is output. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2017-140429, A

  However, if the processing relating to the setting of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player is added to the technique of Patent Document 1, the capacity on the main side may be pressed.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and provides a gaming machine that can reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as a game control means in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of setting values. To aim.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player at different rates depending on the set value (for example, jackpot). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a gaming state),
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled.
First processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value,
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value,
A third process that is executed before the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process (for example, timer update in FIG. 53). A third process executing means (for example, the CPU 103) for executing a process),
The specific effect executing means, the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is the second set value different from the first set value The specific effect is executed so that the rate and the ratio are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B) and (C), FIGS. 60-2 to 60-3),
The first processing execution means executes the first processing based on the timer value updated in the third processing,
The second processing execution means executes the second processing based on the timer value updated in the third processing.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the game machine of means 2,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
With game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state,
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the big hit is the normal state). ), Which is set as a continuous numerical value range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the game machine of means 3,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, an advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) Portion for executing steps S114 to S117),
When a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, the special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. A special state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120),
Display result determination means (for example, CPU 103) that determines the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Which executes steps S59A, S64A, S59B and S64B).
A specific state control unit (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S2207A, S2212A, and S2212A S2207B and S2212B are executed),
The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as a display result of the variable display, and the special display as a display result of the variable display. Includes a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to display and display the result,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of the specific determination values (for example, the CPU 103 changes the setting value in FIG. 31). (The part that executes processing)
The number of the special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when being controlled to the non-specific state and when being controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 58-2 and FIG. 58). 58-3)).
According to this feature, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability, and it is possible to reduce the capacity by making the number of special determination values common, so that the pressure on the main side capacity as the game control means is reduced. be able to.

In addition, the game machine of means 4,
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display). Setting suggestion based on, or a part capable of executing reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, reach announcement based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled, and a setting suggestion. A specific mode (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern),
The predetermined effect execution means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols was started (variable display mode). 5) of the first embodiment, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach announcement lottery, the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined prior to the setting suggestion in step S294. And the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 must be won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed in step S296. , A part that determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in step S301 prior to the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. CPU 120 determines execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach advance notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach advance notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). A portion and the like (see FIG. 59-7 of the first modification) are featured.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect from being inappropriate because the specified effect in the specific mode is executed when the effect state is controlled.
Further, the gaming machine of means 4 may be applied to the gaming machines of means 1 to 3. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means and appropriately realize the effect regarding the set value.

In addition, the game machine of means 5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on the command output from the game control means,
Extraction means (for example, S101 in FIG. 6) for extracting random number values (for example, MR1 to MR3),
The game control means,
Variable display can be executed based on the random number value extracted from the extraction means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6),
A specific command (for example, random number value transmission commands 1 to 4) that processes the random number value (for example, step Sc031 in FIG. 49) is output to the effect control means (for example, step Sc032 in FIG. 49, S27 in FIG. 5). ),
The effect control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and an effect corresponding to variable display based on the restored random number value ( For example, it is characterized in that the prefetching notice effect is controlled (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine of means 1,
The third processing execution means updates a plurality of types of timer values (for example, timer values of a special figure variation time timer and a general figure variation time timer) in the third processing.
According to this feature, since compression can be achieved in a plurality of processes, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means 7 is the gaming machine of means 1 or 6,
The game control means has a fourth processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a fourth processing (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 54) that can call the first processing and the second processing, respectively. Then
In the fourth processing, the fourth processing execution means updates the specific flag information based on the information on the timer value updated in the third processing (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes step S100 of FIG. 54). ,
The first processing execution means and the second processing execution means can execute different processing depending on whether or not the specific flag information updated in the fourth processing has a predetermined value. It has a feature.
According to this feature, since efficient compression is possible, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 1st special figure in the probability change state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a normal state or a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the variable display of the 2nd special figure in a probability change state. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanation diagram showing a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for deviations. It is an explanatory view showing a data holding area for game control. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at a cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormality error or at the time of recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during execution of the setting change process, and (B) is a set value error error, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during setting change. It is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart showing a random number value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display result determination module. It is a flowchart showing a game stop start process. It is a flowchart showing a game stop end process. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the modification A. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the modification A. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the modification A. It is a figure which shows the numerical range of the big hit and the numerical range of the small hit in the modification A. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the production control command in the modification B. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a process related to conversion and restoration of a variation pattern determination random value MR3 in Modification B. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process in Modification B. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process in Modification B. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a prefetching notice setting process in modification B. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special design normal processing using the common buffer in the modification C. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control which performs the timer update process in the modification D. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing which performs the 2nd zero flag update processing in modification D. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process in modification D. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special symbol change processing based on the 2nd zero flag in the modification D. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing based on the 2nd zero flag in the modification D. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and the special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and the special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and the special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal electric auditors product pre-opening process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a setting value suggestive effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of right-handed notification. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production decision processing during variable indication. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a production (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing a production (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach announcement (low) based on pattern PT-8, (B) is a figure which shows the production mode of the reach announcement (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display effect production determination process as the modification 1, (B) is a figure which shows the reach announcement and the determination rate of a setting suggestion when the production type determination table C is used. (A) is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 2, (B) is a figure which shows the effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the reach decision rate of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period when the variation pattern is the normal reach and the set values 1 and 6 and (B) is the variation pattern set by the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a diagram showing a variable display effect type determination rate in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach. It is a diagram showing a variable display effect type determination rate in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a change pattern is super reach. It is a diagram showing the effect type determination ratio during variable display during the second period when the variation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the reach decision rate of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) shows the change pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution determination ratio of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 in super reach. It is a diagram showing a variable display effect type determination rate in the first period when the variation pattern is normal reach. It is a diagram showing a variable display effect type determination rate in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach. It is a figure which shows the production type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when a change pattern is super reach. It is a diagram showing the effect type determination ratio during variable display during the second period when the variation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of production during a variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display during production determination process as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach advance notice and setting suggestion in the first period in the setting value 1 and setting value 6 in which the variation pattern is common to normal reach and super reach in Example 4, and (B) shows the variation pattern. The figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the variation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach announcement and setting suggestion of FIG. It is a diagram showing a variable display during production type determination rate in the first period. It is a diagram showing a variable display effect type determination rate in the second period when the variation pattern is normal reach. It is a diagram showing the effect type determination ratio during variable display during the second period when the variation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the production during a variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the reach decision ratio of the advance notice and the setting suggestion in the first period in the setting value 1 and the setting value 6 common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is the variation pattern in the normal reach / super reach The figure showing the reach decision execution ratio of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion in the second period in common for the set value 1 and the set value 6, (C) shows the variation pattern for both the normal reach and super reach in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the reach determination rate of the reach announcement and setting suggestion in three periods. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice X. It is a figure which shows an example of another execution rate, the appearance rate, and reliability of the notice X. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution rate of a notice Y, and an appearance rate. It is a figure showing an example of an execution rate and an appearance rate of notice Z. It is the figure which shows the production operation example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device. In addition, in the gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a having a glass window is provided between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3 centered on the left side and a door closing position that closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 3 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it. A player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass. The door frame 3a cannot be opened.

  A game information display unit 200 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a lower left position of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), and the game information display unit 200 stores a plurality of types of special identification information. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B that perform variable display (also referred to as special symbol game) of special symbols (also referred to as special symbols) are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol and the normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and a special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Direction scroll display or update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A first pending storage display area 5D and a second pending storage display area 5U are set at two places on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is performed. An active display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are being held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a first withdrawal indicator 25A and a second withdrawal indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and the first withdrawal indicator 25A varies depending on the number of lit LEDs. , 1st reservation storage number is displayed, and the 2nd reservation display unit 25B displays the 2nd reservation storage number according to the lighting number of LED.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is located. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening will be open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 having a special winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When the game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as a "winning prize". In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening and starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

  Further, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a normal symbol display device 20. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal figure game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

  Further, the game information display unit 200 is provided with a universal figure reservation display 25C. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of regular figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls or the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied (stored) to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

  Further, in the game information display unit 200, the above-mentioned first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, first hold indicator 25A, second hold indicator 25B, ordinary symbol display 20, ordinary figure In addition to the hold indicator 25C, the figure hold indicator 25C, a round indicator 131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hit game (big hit type) during a big hit game, a high base state (time saving state), a big hit game state, etc. There are provided a right hitting lamp 132 that lights up in a game state in which the ball is shot toward the right game area 2R, a probability variation lamp 133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time saving lamp 134 that lights up in a high base state (time saving state) ( (See FIG. 9 below).

  The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is formed in the left game area 2L where the game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is the game. The sphere is formed in the right game area 2R where it can flow down.

  The left game area 2L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hit) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 2R is a left game area 2L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. A game ball that is stronger (right-handed) than a game ball that flows down is a game area that flows down after passing through the upper path 2C of the image display device 5.

  In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 2L, and in the right game area 2R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 2R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L can be won in the first start winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of obstacle nails K1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 2L cannot enter the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 2R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Has become.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 51 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value state, a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) and the like which will be described later in the set value changed state. A setting changeover switch 52 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value, and an opening sensor 90 (see FIG. 3 described later) that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state (set value confirmation state) in which a store clerk or the like in the game arcade can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operating portion that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 51 and the setting switching switch 52, is housed in the substrate case 201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 51 and the setting switching switch 52 are included. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear surface of the substrate case 201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 201.

  Since the board case 201 having the lock switch 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate with the gaming machine frame 3 closed, and a predetermined door key can be used. It is possible to operate by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, since the lock switch 51 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 51 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. In the present embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a display monitor 29 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged in the board case 201. The display monitor 29 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 201. That is, the display monitor 29 is arranged on the front surface of the substrate case 201 when the main substrate 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized without opening the gaming machine frame 3, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 refers to the back surface side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

(Outline of game progression)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that a jackpot winning probability according to a set value is changed by a setting change operation by a person on the game hall side (a clerk at the game hall, etc.) using operation means such as a predetermined switch. It is said that. In this way, the rate of ball output (number of balls per unit time (number of prize balls)) changes according to the fact that the winning probability of the big hit can be changed, so changing the set value changes the ball output rate. It can be said that

  The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the general education game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol (a symbol deviating from the symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "deleting the symbol". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) while the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state which will be described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) Is displayed as a stop special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (disappearing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "disappear".

  After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  The type of big hit is set in "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

  In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by reducing the average figure change time (the period during which the figure changes) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (shortening of times of times cut, probability change of times of cut etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same way as when the processing is not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and / or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided on the image display device 5, as the effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative pattern which is not still stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation degree) in which the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is “big hit” according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probability variation big hit" which is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the end of the big jackpot game state, the probability variation state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “out”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination ((“ It is also referred to as "non-reach out".) (The display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach out") in some cases. Further, when the display result is “out”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach out” is displayed). (Also referred to as “”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “out of reach”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the mode which is similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following gaming state high accuracy state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state by executing a common effect after the small hit game state and after the large hit game state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, the passage or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winnings, number of held storages, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, Various functions such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery are included).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described functions of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of)). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies a lamp on / off state) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Then, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, and therefore the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating a display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a computer for hall management installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby executing and holding the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controlling the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the execution and suspension management of the general figure game, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure symbols.

  After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning prize thus set to be transmitted is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a falling symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables (tables in which decision values that are compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special drawing game (special drawing change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Further, when the display result is “out”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "off", the gaming state is updated when the time-saving state or the probability variation state is controlled, and when the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is terminated.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the special winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the jackpot gaming state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing for ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing for opening the small hitting ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 7. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 7 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125, which receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 7 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified by the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voices or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and sending commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative design is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “out”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small hitting game state from the main board 11. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit mid-hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the CPU 120 for production control sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the contents of the production in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Various display devices in the game information display section)
Next, various display devices provided in the game information display unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a deviation or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed with a common combination. ing.

  In the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 4A is a variable display result with two kinds of big hit symbols (combinations of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 4B is variably displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

  In this embodiment, the big hit symbols that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are all different, but the big hits that can be derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. At least a part of the symbols and the big hit symbols that can be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B may be overlapped.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, LEDs of four segments are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, if the number of holding memories is one, only the LED at the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of holding memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, in response to the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage, the LEDs in the pending display corresponding to the variable display are moved in a predetermined shift direction (left direction in the present embodiment). ) Turn off.

  In the present embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. . Therefore, for example, when there is one first special figure reservation memory and two second special figure reservation memories (only the LED on the left end of the first reservation indicator 25A is lit and the second special figure reservation memory is When the left two LEDs of the holding indicator 25B are lit), the first special drawing is displayed after the second special drawing holding memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special drawing holding storage. The variable display based on the pending storage is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the round indicator 131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot type in the present embodiment, there are provided three jackpot types: a jackpot A that is a 5 round jackpot, a jackpot B that is a 10 round jackpot, and a jackpot C that is a 15 round jackpot. Which of the segments composing the round display 131 is lit in accordance with the above.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives points based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not have to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are mounted.

  The program and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in the. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(First embodiment)
First, a first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description will be described. In the first embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting a set value, in order to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main board 11 (main side control board) due to having the setting function. Features and the like will be described.

  FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the first embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special drawing game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, a determination result (preliminary determination result) of whether the variable display result is “out”, “big hit” or “small hit”, or Different EXT data is set according to the determination result (the jackpot type determination result) as to which of the plurality of types the jackpot type when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “out”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit B” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit C” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "small hit".

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the variable stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined to have occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result, for example, by setting the EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the big winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition in order to execute the special figure game which uses the 1st special figure in 1st special design indicator 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start opening winning a prize designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designation command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  Command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store the variable data, and the CPU 103 stores variable data to temporarily store the data. A variable data read operation for reading out, a receiving operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and a CPU 103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

  FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random number values counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11, in the first embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the random number value for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the MR3, the random number value MR4 for determining the figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of the MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  Although the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which the random number values MR1 to MR5 are used as values in the range shown in FIG. 11, the present invention is not limited to this, and the random number values MR1 to MR5 are each. The range of may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “out”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit". Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach off-variation pattern”), The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out variation pattern”). In addition, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the outlier variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "outlier". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the first embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β, ... Like super reach. Alternatively, a plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, as the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ, ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the first embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation patterns super reach α and super reach β. ing. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in the first embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is executed In this case, the special figure variation time is set to be longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, as described above, since the variable display result is set to be a “big hit” in the order of the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach, the big hit expectation degree is set to be high, and thus the normal reach variation pattern is set. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are first determined by the fluctuation pattern type, such as the non-reach type, the normal reach type, and the super reach type. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, but is determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, and these fluctuation pattern type determinations are performed. First, the type of the variation pattern is determined from the random number value for use, and then the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is executed. It may be determined dynamic pattern.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, even if the variation pattern is the same according to the set value that is set, the variation content (effect content) may be different. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 with out-of-normal reach, if the set value set is 1, the variation pattern with out-of-normal reach is set, and if the set value is set to 2, the pseudo continuous effect is produced. If the set value that is set is 3 as a variation pattern that is executed twice and that is out of reach, a pseudo continuous production is executed three times and a variation pattern that is out of super reach ...

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, whereby various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 13 to 26, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol or a normal symbol. A variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are stored is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) shown in FIG. 13A, and the second special figure display result determination table (setting) shown in FIG. 13B. Value 2), the first special figure display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 14 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 14B, FIG. The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 3) shown in FIG. 15B, and the second shown in FIG. 1 special figure display result determination table (setting value 4), second special figure display result determination table (setting value 4) shown in FIG. 16 (B), first special figure display result shown in FIG. 17 (A) Determination table (setting value 5), second special figure display result determination table (setting value 5) shown in FIG. 17B, The first special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in 18 (A), the second special figure display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 18 (B), and FIG. 23 (A) Big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), other than the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 23 (B), a big hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a deviation variation pattern determination A table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. . The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value for the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the amusement hall side is. Become.

  FIG. 13A to FIG. 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the first embodiment, as the display result determination table, the individual display result determination tables for the first special figure and the second special figure are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. A common display result determination table may be used for the special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, in the first special figure display result determination table (setting value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 13B, in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 1) used when the set value is 1 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the gaming state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 14B, in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 2) used when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are “big hits”. ], 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are "big hits". , 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is a probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 3) used when the set value is 3 and the variation special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-described hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the setting value is 4 and the variation special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “outside”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 17B, in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 5) used when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. In the case of the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are "big hits". ], 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is a probability change state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, in the first special figure display result determination table (set value 6) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are “big hits”. ], 32767 to 33094 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “out”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, in the second special figure display result determination table (set value 4) used when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the game state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, it is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are “big hits”. ], 32767 to 33421 are assigned to “small hit”, and other numerical ranges are assigned to “outside”. Further, when the game state is the probability change state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to “out”.

  As described above, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), more determination values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low certainty state) are It is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit". Thereby, in the probability variation state (high accuracy state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state), the special map display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, in the first embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3 and 4 is the set value. In the case of 1/240, when the setting value is 5/1/220, and when the setting value is 6/1/200), it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. (In the first embodiment, the setting value is 1/200, the setting value is 1/180, the setting value is 1/160, and the setting value is 4). If the setting value is 1/140, if the setting value is 5, then 1/120, the setting value 1/100 in the case of 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state or the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 18, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the shortened state is different according to each set value (for example, set value 1 If so, the ratio of the big hit probability in the probability variation state to the big hit probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the ratio of the big hit probability in the probability variation state to the big hit probability in the normal state or the time saving state is It is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the ratio of the big hit probability in the probability changing state to the big hit probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Ri all magnification probabilities constant (e.g., 5 times) may be set to.

  Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the probability that is determined to control the special figure display result "small hit" to the small hit game state has the same value. The judgment value is assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13 (A), FIG. 14 (A), FIG. 15 (A), FIG. 16 (A), FIG. 17 (A), and FIG. 18 (A), as shown in FIG. In the display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

  On the other hand, in each of the second special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "small hit" to the small hit game state regardless of the game state and the set value is the first special value. The determination value is assigned so that it has the same value as that of the graphic display result determination table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13 (B), FIG. 14 (B), FIG. 15 (B), FIG. 16 (B), FIG. 17 (B), and FIG. 18 (B), as shown in FIG. In the display result determination table, regardless of the game state or the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" to be controlled in the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

  In the first embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" regardless of the set value and the odds are determined to be controlled in the small hit game state is the same probability. Is not limited to this, and the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled may be changed according to the set value. Further, the first embodiment exemplifies a form in which the probability of being decided to control the small hitting game state as "small hitting" is changed according to the fluctuation special drawing, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the small hit game state is controlled regardless of the fluctuation special figure may be the same probability.

  Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination values assigned to “big hit” and “small hit” in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 19, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is set as a common numerical value range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

  When the set value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the “big hit”), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is 1238 to 1253 in the setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 in the setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 in the setting value 4, and 1238 to 1317 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346.

  That is, in the first embodiment, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the setting value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the big numerical value falls within the common numerical value range. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical value range are assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1238 as a reference as the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go.

  In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, while 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit determination value is 32767 to 33094 in the numerical range different from the big hit determination value range (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6 as 32767 as the reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value). Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20, in the first special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the probable variation state, the range from 1024 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment.

  When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the “jack”), while the setting value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is 1347 to 1383 in the setting value 2, 1347 to 1429 in the setting value 3, 1347 to 1487 in the setting value 4, and 1347 to 1556 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

  That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, when the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 Among them, only the numerical value within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) is assigned to the “big hit”, but when the setting value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical value in the common numerical value range among the big hit determination values. The numerical value within the range including the range is assigned to the "big hit". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go.

  In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probability change state, the hit determination value is the same as the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, from 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the small value is set. The hit determination value is 32767-33094, with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the range for the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1024 to 1237 among the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment.

  When the set value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the “big hit”), while the set value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is 1238 to 1253 in the setting value 2, 1238 to 1272 in the setting value 3, 1238 to 1292 in the setting value 4, and 1238 to 1317 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346.

  That is, in the first embodiment, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values, only the numerical values within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the “big hit”, while when the set value is 2 or more, the big numerical value falls within the common numerical value range. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical value range are assigned to "big hit". Further, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1238 as a reference as the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go.

  In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Is set to the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, while 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value as described above, The hit determination value is 32767 to 33421 as a reference value of the small hit determination value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the setting value 6. Since the range is set, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 22, in the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the gaming state is the probability variation state, the range from 1024 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment.

  When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the “jack”), while the setting value 2 is set. In the case of the set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical value range of this jackpot determination value is 1347 to 1383 in the setting value 2, 1347 to 1429 in the setting value 3, 1347 to 1487 in the setting value 4, and 1347 to 1556 in the setting value 5. The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

  That is, in the first embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probability change state, when the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0-65535 Among them, only the numerical value within the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) is assigned to the "big hit", but when the setting value is 2 or more, the common numerical value range is not common to the common numerical value range among the big hit judgment values. Numerical value within the range of is assigned to "big hit". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

  For this reason, the jackpot probability increases with the reference value of the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value) set to 1020, and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical value range continuous to the common numerical value range increases. Go.

  In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the probability change state, the hit determination value is the same as the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical range of the small hitting determination value for determining the small hitting regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, from 1020 to 1674 of the hit determination values are set in the numerical range of the big hit determination value, the small value is set. The hit determination value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value for the small hit determination value (small hit reference value) in a numerical range different from the range for the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the setting value 6. Since the range is set, it is possible to prevent the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in each display result determination table, the common numerical value range or the common numerical value is based on the hit determination value of 1020 regardless of the game state and the set value. The judgment value included in the continuous 1 numerical range consisting of the range and the non-common numerical value range is set as the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and continuously based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is determined by using the determination value included in the one numerical value range (common numerical value range) as the numerical value range of the small hit determination value.

  Furthermore, in each of these display result determination tables, when the variation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hitting determination value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hitting determination value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result determination table for the first special figure). The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, whereas the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is decided to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result as "big hit" is the largest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the special value is assigned to the judgment value so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as "big hit" is set (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> set value 4> set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit, the big hit (big hit) A to jackpot C) is decided. Moreover, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 18 (B) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6 as settable values, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set values that can be set in the machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  23 (A) and 23 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 23 (A) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Table. In addition, FIG. 23 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It's a table.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

  Here, the jackpot type in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also called an uncertain variation big hit) that only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state and shifts to a low certainty high base state, and after the big hit game ends The big hit B and big hit C (also referred to as positive variation big hit) are set in which the high accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed to shift to the high accuracy and high base state.

  The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time saving control executed after the jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the first embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before it is executed, it ends by entering the big hit game state.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is big hit B or big hit C, high-precision control and time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

  In the first embodiment, three types of big hit types A to C are provided as big hit types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit types are two types or less, Alternatively, four or more types may be provided.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 23A, in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the setting value is "1", 0 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. To 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the set value is "6", 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished, while the proportion for determining the big hit A is the same, while the time saving control is finished after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability variation control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the highest payout rate is the case where the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the setting values are 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  In the first embodiment, when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is not determined as the big hit B. The example, that is, that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value includes not determining any jackpot type (the determination ratio is 0%). However, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, a case of determining the big hit type as the big hit B may be provided.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value that is set, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. There is.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the big hit type is determined by using the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for result determination.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the first embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of being played, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of a big hit in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big hit game. While the gaming state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V that the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map). If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). Special variable ball A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high, but the number of prize balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6). .

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (every time a game ball passes through a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used to change the game state based on the fact that the game state has changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch. It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and the fluctuation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the pre-determined result. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variable display result is "big hit" and the variable display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is predetermined and the variation pattern determination table that is used when the variable display result is determined to be “off” are prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (A) and 25 (B), as the jackpot variation pattern determination table, a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A, The jackpot variation pattern determination tables (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance, and these jackpot variation pattern determination tables (jackpot A) The fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C) has a fluctuation pattern for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), a fluctuation pattern for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and a fluctuation pattern for super reach β big hits (PB1). -3) For each fluctuation pattern, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take It is assigned as a judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (A), in the big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit A), when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 400 out of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3. Are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are the super reach β jackpot. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 360 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 340 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", 1 to 320 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775 are set. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 25B, in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the setting value is “1”, one of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 is 1 Up to 200 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is "2", from 1 to 997 of the judgment value range of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of super-reach β big hits (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "4", in the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot and 101 to 350 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). And set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 become lower in this order. In addition, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in the first embodiment, when the determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In some cases, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, it may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. It is possible to increase the expectation of the person.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 25 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, in any of the setting values 1 to 6, of the determination value range 0 to 997 of MR3, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for the small hit in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern for the small hit, The variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from the plurality of variation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for deviation, the variation pattern determination table A for deviation used when the number of reserved memories is 1 or less in the low base state where the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Variation pattern determination table B for outliers used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for outliers used when the number of total pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state The pattern determination table C and the out-of-shift variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state where the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for out-of-range, the non-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA1-1) without normalization, the normal-reach out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α out-of-range variation pattern (PA2-2), the super-reach α out-of-range variation pattern A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the variation pattern determination table A for out-of-range (for one or less low-base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the range of the determination value 1 of MR3 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of out-of-range reach (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “2”, 1 to 430 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 431 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 410 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the setting value is “4”, out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 391 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super storage corresponding to the total pending storage numbers of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of out-of-reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3) in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, in the variation pattern determination table B for out-of-range (for low base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the set value is “1”, the range of the determination value of MR3 Of 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super-reach β (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 480 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 481 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 440 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 400 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), and 401 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

  Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and the super-correspondence corresponding to the total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are displayed. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of out-of-reach α (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3) in the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 26C, in the variation pattern determination table C for out-of-range (for 5 or more low-base medium total pending storage numbers), when the set value is “1”, the range of the determination value 1 of MR3 is 1 No. 997 to No. 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of out-of-range reach (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of out-of-reach β (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3) in the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 511 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 is assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time saving control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) with a deviation of super reach β from the range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 26D, in the variation pattern determination table D for out-of-range (for high base medium), when the setting value is “1”, 1 to 1 in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 Up to 550 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are deviated from the super reach α. Is assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-3) of deviation of the super reach β. When the set value is "2", 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 531 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 511 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", 1 to 490 out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), and 451 to 700. Are assigned to the normal reach outlier variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the superreach α outlier variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the superreach β outlier variation pattern. (PA2-3).

  As described above, when the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Is set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the deviation variation determination tables A to D are used, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are variation patterns of super-reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are variation of super reach β deviation. If each variable pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of range, the super-reach variation pattern is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the production effect from being deteriorated due to the variable display not being performed by.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach α deviation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β deviation are completely the same as the variation patterns for deviation between the set values. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α deviations and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β deviations are small differences between the set values ( For example, about 1%).

  In the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the change pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. Is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value being set, even if the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same. Alternatively, only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value being set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the out-of-reach α and the variation pattern of the out-of-reach β are determined. Although an example is shown in which both are the same regardless of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a deviation, the variation of the super reach α deviation is The determination rate of only one of the determination rate of the pattern and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, regardless of the set value being set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the out-of-reach α and the variation pattern of the out-of-reach β are determined. Although an example is shown in which both are the same regardless of the set value being set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting that is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the value, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In the first embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach variation pattern is different depending on the set value, but it is set. Depending on the set value, one or more undetermined variation patterns may be present among the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. That is, when the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

  The variation time of the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is more non-reachable. The fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) of the outlier has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 12). Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time is determined, and the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. When the number of reserved memories is reduced, it is possible to avoid unnecessary start winnings that are not held for memory, and when the number of held memories decreases, fluctuations in non-reach deviation without shortening By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time is lengthened, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the variable display not being executed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C, a variation pattern is determined by using a variation pattern determination table for deviation that differs according to the total number of pending storages. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the number of pending storage in the special symbol subject to change (for example, the number of pending storage of the first special symbol when performing variable display of the first special symbol, When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation pattern may be determined by using a variation pattern determination table for dissimilarity, which is different depending on the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol).

  Further, in each of the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables of the first embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of the numerical values 1 to 6, the super-reach out variation pattern (PA2). -2 and PA2-3) have the same range of random number values. However, since the jackpot probability and the out-of-range probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio in which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the out-of-reach (over-reach The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super-reach deviation depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is exemplified. Is not limited to this, considering the jackpot probability and the outlier probability for each set value, the variable display shows the variation pattern of the out-of-reach reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be executed in.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 27 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area 150 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, a general figure reservation storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game control timer setting unit. 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155.

  The 1st special figure reservation storage section 151A, the game ball passes (enters) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize sphere device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but it has not started yet. The pending data of the figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the winning number in the first starting winning opening (detection order of the game ball) with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. , And is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A indicates that execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  Although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B has not been started yet. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B associates the winning number (game ball detection order) to the second start winning port with the reservation number, and sets the second start condition for the passage (entry) of the game ball. As the pending data, the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. , And is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is displayed. Based on the (result), it becomes the hold information that enables determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  In addition, with the game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening, the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing (entering) of the gaming ball. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  The general figure reservation storage unit 151C stores the reservation information of the general figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit 151C is associated with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passage gate, and is used for determining the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count some or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be one for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. Alternatively, the random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display on the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 28A, the display monitor 29 includes a first display unit 29A, a second display unit 29B, a third display unit 29C, and a fourth display unit 29D. Each of the first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw the shape of "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 29A to the fifth display unit 29E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  The display control of the display monitor 29 in the first embodiment is executed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  On the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 28 (B) and 28 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every 6000 balls out of the entire gaming state (during measurement) Real-time value) base L, the first out in all gaming state Base 1 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every 6000 balls, and the second out in all gaming state Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state for every 6000 balls (low accurate low base state), and the third time out in all gaming states It was calculated for the normal state for every 6000 balls (low accurate low base state) It is possible to display the base value 3 which is the base value. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 29 in percentage.

  When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 29, “b.” Which is an abbreviation of the base L is displayed on the first display unit 29A and “L.” on the second display unit 29B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in order to display "b1." Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. Further, when the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 29B to display "b2." Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D. When displaying the base 3 on the display monitor 29, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 29A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 29B in order to display "b3." Which is an abbreviation of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D.

  The display monitor 29 of the first embodiment is configured to execute control for sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 under the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-29, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 29 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5 second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 29 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 29 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to "5" is "5", each base value on the display monitor 29 is displayed in red, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", the display monitor is displayed. Each base value in 29 It is displayed in purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by confirming the display color of the display monitor 29 without the CPU 103 performing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main processing in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step Sa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step Sa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step Sa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (step Sa004). If the backup data is not stored (step Sa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (step Sa004; N), the process proceeds to step Sa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (step Sa004; N). Sa003; Y, step Sa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any one of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102. Yes (step Sa005).

  When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (step Sa005; N), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 ( In step Sa005; Y), a setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred during execution of the setting value changing process) is set. It is determined whether or not (step Sa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (step Sa006; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, a RAM clear indicating that the RAM clearing process described later has been executed. If the flag is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (step Sa007) and whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. Is determined (step Sa008).

  If the clear switch is ON (step Sa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to step Sa011 (step Sa010). If the clear switch is OFF (step Sa008; N), step Sa010 is executed. Without it, it progresses to step Sa011.

  In step Sa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa011). When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 90 is ON (step Sa012). When the open sensor 90 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 51 ON and the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (step Sa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether it has been done (step Sa013a).

  When the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa013a; Y), the set value changing process (step Sa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sa013d. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (step Sa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sa013d.

  If the lock switch 51 is OFF (step Sa011; N) or the open sensor is OFF (step Sa012; N), the process of steps Sa013a to Sa013c is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sa013d.

  In step Sa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (whether to execute the RAM clear processing (step Sa009)). Yes (step Sa013d). If the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (step Sa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to step Sa014. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa013d; N), the RAM clear is performed. The process proceeds to step Sa014 without executing the process (step Sa013e).

  In step Sa014, the CPU 103 determines again whether or not the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (step Sa014; Y), the process proceeds to step Sa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (step Sa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power is turned off). A recovery process is performed to return to the state of (disconnection) (step Sa015).

  In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and transmits a restoration command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to step Sa028. The process proceeds (step Sa016).

  Further, in step Sa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (step Sa017). When the clear switch is ON (step Sa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa018) or whether the opening sensor 90 is ON (step Sa019).

  When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa018; Y) and the opening sensor 90 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal set value is set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the amusement hall, etc. (the pachinko machine is operated while the clear switch is operated while the gaming machine frame 3 is opened and the lock switch 51 is ON. When the gaming machine 1 is started), the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (step Sa020), and if the setting value changing flag is set, the setting value changing flag is cleared (step Sa021). ). Then, the processing of steps Sa009 to Sa016 described above is executed.

  Note that if the clear switch is OFF (step Sa017; N), the lock switch 51 is OFF (step Sa018; N), or the open sensor 90 is OFF (step Sa019; N), go to step Sa031. move on.

  Further, in step Sa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start (step Sa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (step Sa023), and as shown in FIG. 35 (A), all segments composing the display monitor 29 blink. The notification of the cold start is started by starting (step Sa024).

  After executing step Sa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (step Sa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (step Sa026). If the cold start notification timer has not timed out (step Sa026; N), the processes of steps Sa025 and Sa026 are repeatedly executed, and if the cold start notification timer has timed out (step Sa026; Y), the display monitor The blinking of all the segments in 29 is terminated (step Sa027), and the process proceeds to step Sa028.

  In the first embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started, all segments constituting the display monitor 29 are blinked for the period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold-start notification timer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the time of cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments constituting the display monitor 29 may be blinked, or the display may be performed. You may make it light at least one part of all the segments which comprise the monitor 29.

  Then, in step Sa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (step Sa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and a game control microcomputer so that a timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms). The CTC register built in 100 is set (step Sa029), and interrupts are enabled (step Sa030). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Further, in step Sa031, the CPU 103 controls the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), recovery from power failure during setting change described later, and the like. On the other hand, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (step Sa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (step Sa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (step Sa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (step Sa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (step Sa034; N), the processing of steps Sa033 and Sa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (step Sa034; Y), As shown in FIG. 35B, the first display unit 29A and the second display which configure the display monitor 29 serve as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a setting value abnormality error and recovery from power interruption during setting change. “E.” is displayed on each of the section 29B, the third display section 29C, and the fourth display section 29D (step Sa035).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa036), and causes the pachinko gaming machine 1 to operate. A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game arcade via a terminal board (not shown) provided and the process proceeds to step Sa032 (step Sa037). After that, the CPU 103 displays by repeatedly executing the processing of steps Sa032 to Sa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by an operation such as a clerk at the game hall). The monitor 29, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment displays the display monitor 29 and the first special symbol when the abnormal set value is set or when the power is restored from the power interruption while the set value is being changed. Since the device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B carry out the occurrence notification of the error, the clerk of the game hall or the like is in the middle of the occurrence of the error or the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power has been restored. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption while changing the set value can be recognized by the gaming machine management device, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  In the game control main processing of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or the setting value changing flag is set in step Sa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clearing process (step Sa009) is executed after clearing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in step Sa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in step Sa014. In this case (step Sa014; Y), it may be executed. .

  FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing the RAM clearing process (step Sa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface process. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (step Sa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (step Sa042). Then, it is determined whether or not the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (step Sa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (step Sa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (step Sa044), and the designated address stores the RAM clear flag (F002). It is determined whether or not (step Sa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (step Sa045; N), the process proceeds to step Sa042. If the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (step Sa045; N), Then, the next address is designated and the process proceeds to step Sa042 (step Sa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (step Sa043; Y), the RAM clearing process is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, the RAM 102 in the first embodiment is assigned addresses (F000 to FXXX) for each storage area. Of these storage areas, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and a second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). Other addresses (F003 and later), special figure pending storage and general figure pending storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, game information including error information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1, last special symbol Stored are the setting values read out to set the display result determination table (determination used setting values) when determining a variable display result in normal processing. The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. A value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clearing process in the first embodiment is a process of clearing the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

  Although the first embodiment exemplifies a mode in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. In this case, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the first embodiment) may be cleared.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used as the register of the game control microcomputer 100. (For example, an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, or a general-purpose register) to omit the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102, and the process of the CPU 103. The load may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (step Sa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value change processing, the CPU 103 first executes the game stop start processing (step Sb001). The details of the game stop start processing will be described later.

  Next, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of all the segments that compose the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa051), and the right-handed lamp 132 and the first hold indicator 25A, the second. The hold indicator 25B starts blinking (step Sa052, see FIG. 36A). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment among the segments configuring the round display 131 as a mode corresponding to the setting value changing process (step Sa052a).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa053), and determines whether or not any of the setting values 1 to 6 is stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102. The determination is made (step Sa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in step Sa020), the address F000 in the RAM 102 is set. "1" is set as the value (the set value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to step Sa054 (step Sa053b). If any of the values 1 to 6 is stored as the set value in the RAM 102 (step Sa053a; Y), the process of step Sa053b is not executed and the process proceeds to step Sa054.

  In step Sa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (step Sa055), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (step Sa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (step Sa056; N), the processes of step Sa055 and step Sa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (step Sa056; Y) executes power-off detection processing (step Sa057).

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa058), and through the terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. And outputs a security signal to a management device such as a management computer in the game arcade (step Sa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (step Sa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 52 is operated (step Sa062). If the setting changeover switch 52 has not been operated (step Sa062; N), the process proceeds to step Sa065, and if the setting changeover switch 52 has been operated (step Sa062; Y), the RAM 102 is stored based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 52. The contents of the address F001 are updated (step Sa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 29 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. For example, a value larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 by 1 is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the setting value, such as being stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is “6”, “1” may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa064) and determines whether the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa065). .

  When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of steps Sa062 to Sa065 to store a new temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, and the address F001. A process for displaying the set value stored in the display monitor 29 is executed.

  When the lock switch 51 is OFF in step Sa065 (step Sa065; N), the CPU 103 executes the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (step Sa066), and then executes the game stop ending process ( Step Sb002). The details of the game stop ending process will be described later.

  Next, the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor 29 (step Sa067), and turns off all the segments forming the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Yes (step Sa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 131 (step Sa068, step Sa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069). If the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069; N), the process proceeds to step Sa072, and if the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (step Sa069; Y), Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (step Sa070).

  When the value of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary set value stored in the address F001 (step Sa070; N), the process proceeds to step Sa072 and the address F000 in the RAM 102 is stored. If the stored setting value is different from the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (step Sa070; Y), the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 is Store in address F000 (step Sa071), and proceed to step Sa072. That is, in the process of step Sa071, the temporary setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual setting value.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the set value confirmation processing (step Sa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (step Sb001). Although details of the game stop start processing will be described later, this game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG.

  Next, the CPU 103 starts the lighting of all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa101), and also the right-handed lamp 132 and the first hold indicator 25A, the second. The hold indicator 25B starts blinking (step Sa102, see FIG. 36 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 starts lighting only one segment among the segments configuring the round display 131 as a mode corresponding to the set value confirmation processing (step Sa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed ( Step Sa105). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (step Sa106), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (step Sa107). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (step Sa107; N), the processes of step Sa106 and step Sa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (step Sa107; N). Sa107; Y) executes power-off detection processing (step Sa108). The power-off detection process (step Sa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (step Sa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 29 (step Sa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. And outputs a security signal to a management device such as a management computer in the game arcade (step Sa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa111). When the lock switch 51 is ON (step Sa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 51 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of step Sa111. If the lock switch 51 is OFF in step Sa111 (step Sa111; N), the game stop ending process is executed (step Sb002). Although details of the game stop ending process will be described later, this game stop ending process is common to the game stop ending process of FIG.

  Next, the CPU 103 terminates the display of the set value on the display monitor 29 (step Sa112), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step Sa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 132, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B, and the lighting of the segments forming the round indicator 131 (steps Sa113, Sa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (step Sa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

  In this way, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B and the round display device 131 are lit, and the first reserved display device 25A, the second. By starting blinking of the hold indicator 25B and the right-handed lamp 232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

  In the first embodiment, at the start of the set value change process or the set value confirmation process, one LED of the segments constituting the round display 131 is set as a mode corresponding to the set value change process or the set value confirmation process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segment forming the round display 131 corresponds to any of the big hit A, big hit B, and big hit C. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it is not carried out.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36 (A), at the start of the set value changing process or the set value confirming process, a round indicator is provided as a mode corresponding to the set value changing process or the set value confirming process. Although an example is shown in which the segments configuring 131 illuminate in the same manner, the present invention is not limited to this, and the segments configuring the round indicator 131 are the same as those at the start of the setting value changing process. The light may be turned on in a different mode from that at the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cleared with the lock switch 51 while the gaming machine frame 3 is open. The setting value changing process is executed by turning on the switch.

  At this time, on the display monitor 29, as shown in FIGS. 34 (A) to 34 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first display unit 29A, the second display unit 29B, and the third display unit 29A. The display (display of the base value shown in FIG. 28) using the display unit 29C and the fourth display unit 29D ends. That is, the display monitor 29 in the present embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 29D. When the setting changeover switch 52 is operated while the set value is being displayed on the fourth display unit 29D in this way, the display on the fourth display unit 29D is updated. When the lock switch 51 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 29D is set as a new set value.

  In the first embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after the power is turned off (power cut), the lock switch 51 is turned on (clear switch) while the gaming machine frame 3 is open. Is turned off), the set value confirmation processing is executed.

  At this time, on the display monitor 29, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), FIG. 34 (B), and FIG. 34 (E), the first display unit 29A, the second display unit 29A, by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display (display of the base value shown in FIG. 28) using the display unit 29B, the third display unit 29C, and the fourth display unit 29D ends. That is, the display monitor 29 according to the first embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the set value confirmation process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 29D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 29D ends when the lock switch 51 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (step Sa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation process, first, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power supply cutoff signal from the power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value (step S081). If the power-off signal is not input (step S081; N), the process is terminated, and if the power-off signal is input (step S081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122. Is specified (step S082), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step S083). Then, after creating the check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (step S084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  In the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment, the CPU 103 executes steps S21 to S27 after executing the same power-off detection process (step S200) as steps Sa057 and Sa108 described above. The process of may be executed.

  Next, the start winning determination process according to the first embodiment executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Is determined (step S501a). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is turned on (step S501a; Y), the number of reserved special memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is determined (step S502). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reservation storage number by reading the first reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the number of first special figure reservation storages is not the upper limit value in step S502 (step S502; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1" ( Step S503).

  When the first starting opening switch 22A is off in step S501a (step S501a; N), and when the first special figure reservation storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S502 (step S502; Y), it is variable. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 22B is on (step. S501b). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is turned on (step S501b; Y), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the number of hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is set (step S505). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reservation storage number by reading the second reservation storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second reservation storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S505 (step S505; N), for example, the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S506).

  After performing any of the processes of step S503 and step S506, the special figure reservation storage number corresponding to the starting mouth buffer value that is the stored value of the starting mouth buffer is updated by adding 1 (step S507). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the first holding storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second holding storage number count value is incremented by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the first special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special drawing game using the second special drawing is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to be incremented by 1 (step S508). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to be incremented by 1.

  After executing the process of step S508, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination or the jackpot type determination from the numerical value data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 for random number and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are extracted and specified (step S509). Numerical data indicating each random value thus extracted is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S510). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B.

  Numerical data showing the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit", and further the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when making a "big hit". The random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a variable display time of a special symbol or a decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step S509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for the determination of the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, and The variable display result determination module (step S525), which will be described later, specifies the variable display result for determination.

  Following the processing of step S510, the transmission setting of the starting mouth prize designation command according to the starting mouth buffer value is performed (step S511). For example, when the starting mouth buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first starting mouth winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning award designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning award designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 is notified. The setting for transmitting the second start opening winning a prize designation command is performed. The start opening winning award designation command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, and the like, from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S511, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S512). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the reservation storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reservation storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S513). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed, and the like, from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S513, it is determined whether or not the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S514). At this time, if the starting opening buffer value is "1" (step S514; Y), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S515), and then the processing of step S504 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S514; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S516), and then the starting winning prize is given. The process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

  FIG. 38 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S512 of FIG. 37 as the winning random number determination process. In the first embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display process (variable display result of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal process (step S22 of FIG. 6, FIG. 39) described later. ) Is a "big hit" to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, and a special figure display result is "small hit" to determine whether to control the small hitting gaming state. On the other hand, in addition to these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number determination process of step S512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, whether or not it is determined that the big hit pattern or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the predetermined display mode with super reach, etc. I do. Thereby, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before the special drawing display result is "big hit" or "small hit", it is determined which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result Then, the CPU 120 for effect control or the like executes a pre-reading notice effect such as a hold display notice effect as described later.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 38 (A), the CPU 103 first checks the state of the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, for example, and thereby the pachinko gaming machine 1 The current game state in is identified (step S521). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. At times, it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

  Following the processing of step S521, the CPU 103 refers to the top address (see FIG. 30B) in the RAM 102 and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S522). Next, the special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current game state, starting opening buffer value and setting value is selected and set (step S524). Then, in the variable display result determination module (step S525) shown in FIG. 40, processing for determining whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “out” is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40, in the variable display result determination module, the CPU 103 stores numerical value data indicating the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the set special figure display result determination table and the specified random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination. Are compared (step S571), and it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S572). At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined as the “jackpot”.

  When it is determined in step S572 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S572; Y), it is determined that the jackpot is the jackpot in variable display (step S576). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S572 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the variable display (step S572; N), the small figure in the set special figure display result determination table is set. The numerical range of the hit determination value is compared with the numerical data indicating the specified random number MR1 for the special figure display result determination (step S573), and the random number for the special figure display result extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is compared. It is determined whether or not the numerical value data indicating the numerical value MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step S574).

  When it is determined that the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hitting determination range (step S574; Y), it is determined that the small hit is present in the variable display (step S577). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S574 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit does not occur in the variable display (step S574; N), it is determined that there is a deviation in the variable display. (Step S575).

  Returning to FIG. 38 (A), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display in step S575 (step S526), and when it is determined not to be a big hit (step S526; N), it is changed in step S525. It is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a small hit in the display (step S527), and when it is determined not to be a small hit, that is, when it is determined to be out of the variable display (step S526; N), the variable display The transmission setting of the first symbol designating command, which is the symbol designating command according to the result being “out”, is executed (step S527a), and whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, the current gaming state is time saving. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S528).

  When it is determined in step S526 that the jackpot is a big hit in the variable display (step S526; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination and the jackpot type determination table (step S533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variation special map (“first special map” corresponding to “1” or “second special map” corresponding to “2”) specified in correspondence with the starting opening buffer value. , The big hit type judging table data is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type judging table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

  Further, a symbol designating command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designating command when it is a jackpot A, a third symbol designating command when it is a jackpot B, and a fourth symbol when it is a jackpot C. The transmission setting of the symbol designating command is executed (step S534), and then, as the table for determining the big hit variation pattern, the big hit variation pattern determination table corresponding to the big hit type is selected and set (step S535), It proceeds to step S536.

  Further, when it is determined in step S527 that a small hit will be made in the variable display (step S527; Y), the sixth symbol designating command which is the symbol designating command corresponding to the variable display result being "small hit" The transmission setting is executed (step S531), the small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step S532), and the process proceeds to step S536.

  If the time saving flag is not set in step S528 (step S528; N), the variation pattern determination table A for deviation is selected and set (step S529), and if the time saving flag is set ( In step S528; Y), the deviation variation pattern determination table D is selected and set (step S530). The out-of-shift variation pattern determination table A is an out-of-shift variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending storages is 2 or less. The out-of-shift variation pattern determination table D is an out-of-transition variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is the high base state where the time saving control is executed.

  In addition, in addition to these out-of-range variation pattern determination table A and out-of-range variation pattern determination table D, out-of-range variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4, Although the variation pattern determination table for deviation C used when the number of total pending storage is 5 or more is prepared in advance, as shown in FIG. 26, the variation pattern determination table for deviation A does not reach the reach. For the variation pattern, within the range that the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take, the setting value 1 is 1 to 450, the setting value is 1 to 430, and the setting value is 3. 1 to 410, 1 to 390 when the set value is 4, 1 to 370 when the set value is 5, and 1 to 350 when the set value is 6.

  Further, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, for a non-reach variation pattern, within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, if the setting value is 1, 1 to 500, the setting value is 1 to 480 when the value is 2, 1 to 460 when the setting value is 3, 1 to 440 when the setting value is 4, 1 to 420 when the setting value is 5, and 1 to 4 when the setting value is 6. 400 are assigned respectively.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for deviation and the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, when the setting value is 1 in the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for a non-reach variation pattern, 1 to 550, 1 to 530 when the set value is 2, 1 to 510 when the set value is 3, 1 to 490 when the set value is 4, 1 to 470 when the set value is 5, If the value is 6, 1 to 450 are assigned.

  On the other hand, in each of the out-of-range variation pattern determination tables, 701 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of the super reach for the variation patterns of the dynamic pattern determination, regardless of the set values. There is.

  Therefore, in step S529, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation variation pattern determination table A or the deviation variation pattern determination table D, in the determination of non-reach and super reach, the number of pending storage changes after the determination. However, since the variation pattern is always non-reach or super-reach, the variation pattern is determined by using the variation pattern determination table A for loss or the variation pattern determination table D for loss in the determination at the time of starting winning. There is.

  After performing any of the processing of step S529, step S530, step S532, and step S535, each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are set. The variation category is determined by using the range of the determination value including the random value MR3 (step S536). Then, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), when at least the variable display result is “out”, the variable category which is the variable display mode of “non-reach” in common regardless of the total pending storage number, and “ A random category MR3 is provided with a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach" and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach or small hit). It suffices to be able to determine whether or not to be determined in such a variation category based on.

  After that, after setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S536 to the effect control board 12 (step S537), the winning random number determination process is ended.

  The symbol designating command and the variation category designating command are transmitted by the CPU 103 executing a command control process.

  39 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol reservation storage number is "0" (step S541). The second special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S541, the second hold storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

  When the number of the second special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S541 (step S541; N), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponding to the reservation number "1" is held. Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read and specified (step S542). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S542, the second special figure pending storage number count value and the total pending storage number count value are decremented by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number are decremented by 1. And the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B are used. The reserved data shown is shifted upward by one entry (step S543).

  After that, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S544), and the process proceeds to step S549.

  On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation storage number is "0" in step S541 (step S541; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation storage number is "0" (step S545). . The first special figure reservation storage number is the reservation storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S545, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved storage number count value stored in the first reserved storage number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Good. Thus, the process of step S545 is executed when it is determined in step S541 that the second special figure pending storage number is "0", and the first special figure pending storage number is "0". Or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

  The special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be used. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls have entered (passed) and the starting prize has been generated. In this case, a table that stores data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

  When the number of the first special figure reservation storage is other than "0" in step S545 (step S545; N), the reservation stored corresponding to the reservation number "1" in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A As data, numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination, a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and a random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are read and specified (step S546). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored by being stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S546, the first special figure pending storage number count value and the total pending storage number count value are decremented by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending storage number and the total pending storage number are decremented by 1. And the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries (eg, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) lower than the reservation number “1” in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A are stored. The reserved data shown is shifted upward by one entry (step S547).

  After that, the value of the variable special map designation buffer, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step S548), and the process proceeds to step S549.

  In step S549, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by checking the states of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and the like (step S549). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on, identifies the time variation state when the probability variation flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are off. At times, it is sufficient to specify that it is in a normal state.

  Following the processing of step S549, the CPU 103 refers to the head address of the RAM 102 (see FIG. 30B) and identifies the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S550).

  Next, the CPU 103 refers to the game information (see FIG. 30B) stored in the RAM 102, and determines whether or not the determination used set value is stored (step S551). If it is determined that the judgment used set value is stored (step S551: Y), the set value specified in step S550 is compared with the stored judgment used set value (step S552) to specify. It is determined whether or not the set value and the stored determination used set value are the same (step S553).

  In step S553, when it is determined that the specified setting value and the stored determination used setting value are not the same (step S553: N), an error designation according to the abnormality of the setting value is given to the effect control board 12. A setting for transmitting a command is performed (step S554), and a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer in a game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S554). S555), the loop processing is started. After that, the CPU 103 does not execute any other processing, so that the loop processing puts the pachinko gaming machine into a game-disabled state (game-disabled state). The error designation command is transmitted when the CPU 103 executes the command control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the set value (determined used set value) referred to when the previous variable display is executed and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102. If it is different, it is possible to recognize that the determined used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different in the management device of the game hall, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is designed to improve security.

  In the first embodiment, the CPU 103 executes the loop processing so as not to execute other processing, thereby controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the inoperable state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The CPU 103 does not restrict the launch of the game balls, and does not perform the payout of the prize balls or the variable display of the special symbols even if the game balls enter the respective winning openings. Thus, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be controlled to be in a game-disabled state.

  Further, in the special symbol normal process of the first embodiment, the determination used setting value and the setting value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, and the abnormality is managed by the management device of the game hall. In FIG. 35 (B), the display monitor 29, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B are illustrated, for example. ) Or a display mode (lighting mode) as shown in FIG. 36B, the abnormality may be notified to the player, the clerk at the game hall, or the like.

  Further, in the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment, if the determination used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, transmission of an error designation command to the effect control board 12 and Although an example is shown in which the security signal is output to the management device of the game arcade only once, the present invention is not limited to this, and transmission of these error designation commands and security signal The output may be repeatedly executed every predetermined period in the above-mentioned unplayable state.

  Further, in the special symbol normal process of the first embodiment, if the determination used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 disables the pachinko gaming machine 1 However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the determined used set value and the set value currently stored at the head address of the RAM 102 are different, the CPU 103 causes the pachinko It is not necessary to control the gaming machine 1 to the game-disabled state.

  Furthermore, when the determination used set value and the set value currently stored in the head address of the RAM 102 are different from each other and the CPU 103 does not control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the unplayable state, for example, a game hall. Only the output of the security signal to the management device may be executed, or the setting value stored in the head address of the RAM 102 may be reset and designated. In the case of resetting the set value stored in the head address of the RAM 102, for example, the determined used set value may be stored in the head address of the RAM 102, or the most disadvantageous value to the player (the first value). In the first embodiment, setting 1) may prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from being excessively advantageous to the player against the intention of the game hall.

  When it is determined in step S551 that the determination used set value is not stored, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by cold start and executes the first variable display (step S551: N) or specified in step S553 When it is determined that the set value that has been set and the stored determination used set value are the same (step S553: Y), the special figure display result determination according to the current game state, the starting mouth buffer value, and the set value A table is selected and set (step S556). After that, the same processing as the processing executed by the variable display result determination module in step S525 shown in FIG. 38A, that is, the processing of steps S571 to S577 shown in FIG. 40 is performed (step S557).

  Succeedingly, in a step S557, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variable display is a big hit (step S558), and when it is determined that it is not the big hit (step S558; N), it is determined in a step S557 that the variable display is a small hit. It is confirmed whether or not (step S559).

  When it is determined in step S558 that the jackpot will be a big hit in the variable display (step S558; Y), the jackpot flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S561). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIGS. 23A and 23B is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types (step S562). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data showing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, and "big hit A" and "big hit B" in the jackpot type judgment table , Jackpot type is determined according to which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type of “big hit C” is selected (step S563).

  By determining the type of big hit in the process of step S563, the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is any one of the shortened state and the probability variation state which is more advantageous to the player than the shortened state. Whether or not to control is determined before the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is derived. In accordance with the jackpot type thus determined, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S564), the jackpot type determined Memorize As an example, if the type of big hit is “big hit A”, it is “1”, if it is “big hit B”, it is “2”, and if it is “big hit C”, it is “3”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S559 that the variable display will result in a small hit (step S559; Y), the process proceeds to step S560, and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the ON state. (Step S560).

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S559 that a small hit will occur in the variable display, that is, if there is a deviation in the variable display (step S559; N), the flow proceeds to step S565.

  In step S565, whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set), whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set) ) Predetermined result, further, in accordance with the determination result of the big hit type in the case of a big hit game state, set the fixed special symbol. As an example, the special symbol indicating the symbol "-" which is a deviating symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol in correspondence with the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is "deviant". Further, if it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" in step S558, if the big hit type in step S563 is "big hit A", the special symbol indicating the number "1" is determined. Set as a special design. Further, when the big hit type is "big hit B", the special symbol indicating the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure display result is "small hit" in step S559 (the small hit flag is set in step S560), the special figure display result is set to "small hit". Corresponding to the pre-determined result of, the special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small hit symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. It should be noted that these fixed special symbols are examples, and fixed special symbols other than these may be set, or a plurality of types of symbols may be set as fixed special symbols.

  After the fixed special symbol is set in step S565, the setting value specified in step S553 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the determination used setting value (step S566), and then the value of the special figure process flag is changed to the variation pattern setting process. After updating to the corresponding value of "1" (step S567), the special symbol normal processing is ended.

  If the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S545 (step S545; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S568), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demo display setting, for example, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5 is controlled from the main board 11. It is determined whether it has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting ends.

  In the first embodiment, since the determination used set value is stored in the RAM 102 as one of the game information (see FIG. 30 (B)), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start. Exemplifies a form in which the judgment used set value does not exist when executing the first variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the judgment used set value is stored in the RAM 102 in the RAM. By storing in the area that has not been cleared by the clearing process, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the judgment used set value and the top address of the RAM 102 are executed when executing the first variable display. The stored set values (set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) may be compared.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the variable display result determination module that performs common processing is used to determine the variable display result, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display result determination module is not limited to this, and the variable display result determination module compares the setting value specified by the CPU 103 (the setting value stored at the head address of the RAM 102) with the determination used setting value (see FIG. 39). Steps S551 to S553 shown) or processing for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a game stop state when the setting value specified by the CPU 103 as the processing result and the determination used setting value do not match (steps S554 to S55). S555) and the like may be included. By doing so, the process of comparing the set value specified by the CPU 103 with the determined used set value even when the winning random number determination process is executed, and the set value specified by the CPU 103 as the process result and the determined use Since the process of controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the game stopped state can be executed when the set value does not match, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be further improved.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops counting the plurality of timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

  The V lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain variation state based on passing through a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change) and is controlled to the open state and the closed state. In the V-probability variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. Such an area where the V lid is in an open state is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning that determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103, after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state, has passed through a predetermined switch with a game ball (the player enters the special winning opening near the closing of the special winning opening door and sets the predetermined value. A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

  The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from the open state of the variable winning ball device 6B to the closed state by the electric Chu opening time timer. .

  The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

  The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which a fanfare production is performed as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses the fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

  The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

  The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a general figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start process (process of step Sb001) in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (step Sb010). In step Sb010, if the attacker opening time timer is in operation (step Sb010; Y), the attacker opening time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the attacker opening time timer is not in operation (step Sb010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (step Sb011). If the inter-round interval period timer is operating in step Sb011 (step Sb011; Y), the inter-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (step Sb011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (step Sb012). In step Sb012, if the V lid opening time timer is operating (step Sb012; Y), the operating V lid opening time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (step Sb012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (step Sb013). In step Sb013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (step Sb013; Y), the operating V passage waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (step Sb013; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is in operation (step Sb014). In step Sb014, if the power-chu open time timer is operating (step Sb014; Y), the power-chu open time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not in operation (step Sb014; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation time timer is in operation (step Sb015). In step Sb015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (step Sb015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (step Sb015; N), it is determined whether or not the universal figure variation time timer is in operation (step Sb016). In step Sb016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (step Sb016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process is ended. If the universal figure variation time timer is not operating (step Sb016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (step Sb017). In step Sb017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (step Sb017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not operating (step Sb017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (step Sb018). In step Sb018, if the ending time timer is operating (step Sb018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (step Sb020), and the process is ended. If the ending time timer is not in operation (step Sb018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (step Sb019). In step Sb019, if the other timers are operating (step Sb019; Y), the other timers operating are stopped (step Sb020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (step Sb019; N), the other process (step Sb021) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (step Sb021) includes the following processing. For example, the process of invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of invalidating various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of invalidating the detection of various errors, The process of invalidating the payout of prize balls is included. By the other processing (step Sb021), various processing is invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end process)
Next, the game stop ending process (step Sb002) in FIGS. 31 and 32 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game stop ending process. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (step Sb030). In step Sb030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (step Sb030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the attacker opening time timer is not stopped (step Sb030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (step Sb031). If the inter-round interval period timer is stopped in step Sb031 (step Sb031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process is ended.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (step Sb031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (step Sb032). If the V-lid opening time timer is stopped in step Sb032 (step Sb032; Y), the stopped V-lid opening time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (step Sb032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb033). In step Sb033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (step Sb033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (step Sb033; N), it is determined whether or not the power-chew opening time timer is stopped (step Sb034). In step Sb034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (step Sb034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process is ended. If the power switch opening time timer is not stopped (step Sb034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (step Sb035). In step Sb035, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb035; Y), the stopped special figure fluctuation time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (step Sb035; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is stopped (step Sb036). In step Sb036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (step Sb036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (step Sb036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (step Sb037). If the fanfare time timer is stopped in step Sb037 (step Sb037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (step Sb037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (step Sb038). In step Sb038, if the ending time timer is stopped (step Sb038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (step Sb038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (step Sb039). In step Sb039, if the other timers are stopped (step Sb039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (step Sb040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (step Sb039; N), the other processing (step Sb041) is executed, and then the processing ends.

  Here, the other processing (step Sb041) includes the following processing. For example, the process of enabling the firing of the hit ball operation handle 30, the process of enabling various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for validating the payout of prize balls. By the other process (step Sb041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(Effects of game stop start processing and game stop end processing, etc.)
As described above, as shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. The time measurement of the period is stopped, and the time measurement of the period of the attacker opening time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmed state, and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period between rounds interval timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the period between rounds, and the setting confirmation state is ended. Based on this, the timing of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of V winning, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the electric chew opening time timer based on the control to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state. Then, based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the power cable open time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special confirmation variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state while being executed, Based on the completion of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the universal figure variable time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled while the fanfare production is being performed, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the end, the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirmation state. .

As shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the completion, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirmed state. .

  As shown in FIG. 31 to FIG. 42, the CPU 103 controls the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. Stops the time measurement of the period and restarts the time measurement of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game is advanced by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In the first embodiment, the game machine (so-called first-type game machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol has been described, but the special feature provided in the game area A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit game state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V winning) a special winning opening (V winning opening) in a variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) Alternatively, it may be applied to a gaming machine (one-two-mixer) in which the first type and the second type are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first start winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second-class big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

  In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that the game balls that have passed the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer are within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is determined to be valid. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on being controlled to the setting check state when in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing this, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and it is possible for the player to be disadvantaged because the game is advanced by executing the control in the small hitting game state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described first embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 31 to 42, similar control may be executed in the setting change state. .. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on being controlled to a setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the completion of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

  The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in a display error, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. . In this way, for the jackpot display result that is advantageous for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviated display result is not disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

  The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

(Effects and the like according to the first embodiment)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, the hit determination value is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Of these, the range from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value. Then, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), according to each set value from 1238. The range up to the specified value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the hit determination value of 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, and the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value are Since it is set to be a continuous numerical range, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state, the value of the random number value MR1 is from 1020 to a non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not the value is within the numerical range up to the maximum value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in the advantageous state.

  In particular, in the first embodiment, the numerical range of the jackpot determination value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one location with 1020 as the reference value, so a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state determination value are provided. Since it is not necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) a plurality of times as compared with the case where It is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether to control in the advantageous state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, the above-described hit determination value of 1020 is the big hit standard. As the value, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value are set to be a continuous numerical value range, so when judging whether or not to be controlled to the big hit game state, a random number value Whether the value of MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range according to the probability variation state Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is within the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, in the display result determination table, the variation special figure is included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value depending on whether it is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of judgment values is different (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, whereas the number of judgment values in the second special figure display result judgment table is small. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 655, which is about double.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). .. For this reason, when determining whether or not to be controlled to the small hitting game state, the value of the random number value MR1 is a numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hitting determination value according to the fluctuation special figure. Since it suffices to determine whether or not it is within, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the small hitting gaming state.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the numerical value range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical value range of the jackpot determination value when the setting value is 6, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled. When performing, it is sufficient to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value, and whether or not the small hitting game state is controlled. When performing the determination of, it is sufficient to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the variation special figure, so that the CPU 103 performs the big hit game. It is possible to reduce the processing load for performing the processing load as well as the determination of whether to control the Koatari gaming state to determine whether or not to control the state.

  In addition, the RAM 102 in the first embodiment can store the installation value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 in the first embodiment reads the setting value stored in the RAM 102 each time the variable display is started (every time when the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined). Along with setting the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value corresponding to the read setting value (setting the display result determination table according to the setting value), whether to control the jackpot gaming state Is determined. That is, since the CPU 103 reads the set value from the RAM 102 every time the variable display is executed and sets the display result determination table according to the read set value, the inappropriate set value is read and the inappropriate variable is set. It is possible to prevent the display result from being determined.

  In the first embodiment, the setting value is read from the RAM 102 every time variable display is executed, and the display result determination table corresponding to the read setting value is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the CPU 103 may read the set value from the RAM 102 and set the display result determination table according to the read set value. In addition, when setting the display result determination table according to the set value read from the RAM 102 at the time when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in this way, the setting is made during the period until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. All variable display results may be determined using the display result determination table.

  Further, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the RAM 102 every time the variable display is started (every time when the variable display result of the variable display to be started is determined), and the read set value and the previous variable display result are read. When the setting value read out from the RAM 102 for determination (the determination used setting value) is compared and the setting value read out from the RAM 102 this time does not match the determination used setting value as the result of the comparison, the effect is produced. An error designation command is transmitted to the control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 issues an error notification indicating that the set value information is abnormal based on the reception of the error designation command from the CPU 103 (for example, an image. It is also possible to display a notification image according to an error on the display device 5. By executing the error notification in this manner, it is possible to prevent an inappropriate determination of the variable display result from being made by reading an inappropriate setting value. Further, it is possible not only to more accurately specify that the inappropriate setting value is set in the RAM 102, but also to make the surroundings of the gaming machine recognize that the setting value set in the RAM 102 is abnormal. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade can promptly deal with the abnormal set value.

  In the first embodiment, the mode in which the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value are compared each time the variable display is executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the set value stored in the RAM 102 and the determined used set value may be executed based on the predetermined number of times of variable display or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, the CPU 103 determines a variable display result by using a variable display result determination module that is common when executing the winning random number determination and when executing the special symbol normal process. Therefore, a part of the processing can be shared between the time of executing the winning random number determination and the time of executing the special symbol normal processing, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, if the variation special maps are the same, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the CPU 103 sets the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display (the display result determination table according to the setting value read from the RAM 102 is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls to the small hitting game state. Further, like the first embodiment, the big hitting judgment according to the set value read from the RAM 102. When setting the numerical range of the value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the processing for setting the display result judgment table corresponding to the set value read from the RAM 102 is made common. Since it is possible, it is also possible to reduce the volume of the processing program.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 19 to FIG. 22, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1 (the setting value with the lowest jackpot probability), the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set. Since there is not, if 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state by targeting only the common numerical value range as the numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state can be reduced.

  Note that, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the big hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical value range of the big hit determination values, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit reference value may be set to the maximum value in the common numerical value range of the big hit determination values. That is, in the first embodiment, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to be continuous from the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value may be set to be continuous from the minimum value of the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, a mode in which the small hit reference value is set to the lowest value in the common numerical value range of the small hit determination values is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit reference value may be set to the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the small hit determination values.

  Although the first embodiment has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and modifications and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Be done.

  For example, in the first embodiment, the game information display unit 200, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal symbol display device. 20, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, the round indicator 131, the right-handed lamp 132, the probability variation lamp 133, and the time saving lamp 134 have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and game information display. The unit 200 may include at least the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value confirmation process is being executed (setting value confirmation state). Although the display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are lit in the same manner as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. When the set value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be lit or blinked in different modes. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value changing state or the set value confirming state depending on the lighting or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by turning on all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the first special symbol A mode in which the display mode (lighting mode) of the display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is different from the display mode when the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B derives and displays the variable display result. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the display mode (lighting mode) of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state is If the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display It may not light the part of the segment of the total segments constituting the location 4B.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, all of the segments and the round display 131 which constitute the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured. Illustrated is a mode in which the segments are lit up and the right striking lamp 132 and all the segments composing the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are blinked, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, one segment constituting the round indicator 131 is turned on, the right hitting lamp 132 blinks, and all the segments constituting the first reserved indicator 25A and the second reserved indicator 25B. The blinking of may not be executed, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 131 is lit, but the present invention is not limited to this. The combination is not limited to a big hit A, a big hit B, and a big hit C, and the number of the segments constituting the round indicator 131 in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state is plural. It may be.

  Further, in the first embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the set value abnormality error is executed by using the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead of this, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be lit or blinked to notify that a set value error has occurred.

  Further, in the first embodiment, a mode in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with the display monitor 29 for displaying the base value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be used. May not include the display monitor 29. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 29 as described above, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state may be newly provided. .

  Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, the round indicator which constitute the game information display section 200. 131, the right-handed lamp 132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not limited, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reserved display 25A, the second reserved display 25B, the round display 131, which configures the game information display unit 200. The right-handed lamp 132 or the like may be displayed (lit or blinked) during the game as long as it can inform that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. .

  Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, the round indicator which constitute the game information display section 200. 131, the right-handed lamp 132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Without being limited to this, the “mode different from during a game” may include different blinking periods, brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first reserved indicator 25A, the second reserved indicator 25B, the round indicator which constitute the game information display section 200. 131 and the right-handed lamp 132 are lit or blinked to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, round An explanation that the display 131 and the right-handed lamp 132 are turned on or blinked is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a position near the game information display unit 200). Good. By doing so, the clerk of the game hall or the like who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold It is possible to prevent the lighting or blinking of the display device 25B, the round display device 131, and the right-handed lamp 132 from being mistakenly recognized as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In the game control main processing of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or the setting value changing flag is set in step Sa021. Although the mode in which the RAM clearing process (step Sa009) is executed after clearing is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When it is determined that the clear switch is ON in step Sa008 (step Sa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in step Sa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in step Sa014. In this case (step Sa014; Y), it may be executed. .

(Modification A: Modification regarding numerical range of large hit judgment value and small hit judgment value)
Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (the common numerical range of the small hit determination values) is set to the large hit determination value regardless of the game state or the set value. Although provided in a different range which is not continuous with the numerical range, the present invention is not limited to this. Modification A regarding the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value in the first embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44.

  In the modified example A, as shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B), a numerical range of the big hit judgment value and a numerical range of the small hit judgment value are continuously provided regardless of the game state or the set value. Good.

  In addition, when a numerical range of the big hit judgment value and a numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value) are continuously provided in this way, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is increased. By shifting the reference value of the small hit determination value accordingly, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be changed while maintaining the number of determination values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value.

  Specifically, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, as shown in FIG. 43 (A), when the set value is 1, the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set to 1024 to 1237. At the same time, the common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1565 (1238 is a reference value of the small hit judgment value) so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value. When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1238 to 1253 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1237) of the big hit judgment value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1254 to 1581 (1254 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is set to 1238 to 1272 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1237), and the small hit judgment value The common numerical value range is set to 1273 to 1600 (1273 is a reference value of the small hit determination value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

  When the game state is the probability change state, as shown in FIG. 43 (B), when the setting value is 1, the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1024 to 1346 and the small hit determination value is set. 1347 to 1674 (1347 is a reference of the small hitting judgment value so that the common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value is shifted by an amount increased from the normal state or the time saving state and continues to the common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value. Value). When the set value is 2, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1383 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1384 to 1711 (1384 is a reference value of the small hitting judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value. When the set value is 3, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to 1347 to 1429 so as to be continuous with the common numerical value range (1020 to 1346) of the big hit determination value, and the small hit determination value The common numerical value range is set to 1430 to 1757 (1430 is the reference value of the small hitting judgment value) so as to be continuous with the non-common numerical value range of the big hitting judgment value. After that, even when the set value is 4 to 6, the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value may be similarly set.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44, as a mode in which the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value) are set continuously, as shown in FIG. The numerical value range of the judgment value is set to a range of 65308 to 65535 (the range of the trailing end of the numerical value that the hit judgment value can take), and the common numerical value of the big hit judgment value is continuous to the numerical range of the small hit judgment value. You may set the range (64990-65207). Further, in this case, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is set to be continuous to the common numerical value range of the big hit determination value, and the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is changed according to the set value. Therefore, the jackpot probability may be changed according to the set value.

  When setting the numerical range of the big hit determination value and the numerical range of the small hit determination value as shown in FIG. 44, first, when determining the variable display result, the CPU 103 first determines that the random number value MR1 is the big hit. It is determined whether or not the minimum value of the determination values (64990 in the setting value 1, 64974 in the setting value 2 and 64954 in the setting value 3 in the example shown in FIG. 44) is equal to or more than the value of the random number value MR1. When it is determined that is equal to or greater than the minimum value of the big hit determination value, it is further determined whether the random number value MR1 is 65208 or more, which is the reference value of the small hit determination value. It is sufficient to determine whether it is a small hit or a small hit. By performing the variable display determination in this way, the variable display result is determined without executing both the determination whether the variable display result is a big hit and the determination whether the variable display result is a small hit. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the determination of the variable display result of the CPU 103.

  As described above, in FIGS. 43 and 44, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (when the set value of 1 is set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value) And the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value and the non-common numerical value range and the common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value when 2 to 6 are set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1) Is set as a continuous numerical range from 1020 which is the reference value of the big hit judgment value, and the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is set so as to include the same number of determination values in a continuous range. Therefore, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of 1020 and the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value, and thereby the large hit game state or the small hit game state. It is possible to determine whether or not to control. Furthermore, when it is determined to control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the big hit game is judged by determining whether or not the random number value MR1 is equal to or larger than the minimum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the set value. Since it is possible to determine whether to control the state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 103 determines whether to control the large hitting game state or not, and whether or not to control the small hitting game state. It is possible to reduce the processing load of performing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 43, when the game state is controlled by the CPU 103 to the probability variation state, the jackpot determination value increases as a continuous numerical value range from the jackpot reference value 1020, and the increased jackpot determination value. Since the numerical range of the small hit determination value shifts according to the range, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to control the big hit game state within the numerical range in which the number of the big hit determination values increases, and controls to the small hit game state. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether to control in the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the small hit game state. it can.

  Also in the forms shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value is not set, so the CPU 103 makes a big hit. Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state only in the common numerical value range of the determination values, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 that determines whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state. .

  43 and 44, the mode in which the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set to be continuous with the maximum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the numerical range of the small hit determination value may be set so as to be continuous with the minimum value of the numerical range of the big hit determination value.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, a mode in which the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value are continuously set is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. As shown in 46, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value may be set to different numerical value ranges.

  In addition, when setting the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value to different numerical value ranges as described above, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value (the small hit judgment value Common numerical value range) of the big hit judgment value is different from the common numerical value range, and the non-common numerical value range (the number of judgment values included in the non-common numerical value range is the most when the setting value of the big hit judgment value is 6) In a numerical range different from the large numerical range), a numerical range continuous from the reference value of the small hit determination value (32767 to 33094 in FIG. 45, 32767 to 33421 in FIG. 46, the reference value of the small hit determination value is 32767).

  45 and 46, the reference value of the small hit determination value is common according to the variation special figure, but the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit determination value is different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reference value of the small hit judgment value and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value are the same regardless of the variation special figure. It may be.

(Effects etc. of Modification A)
As described above, in the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1020 to 1237 with 1020 as the reference value regardless of the set value. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2 to 6, a different numerical value from the common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value and the numerical value range of the small hit judgment value (common numerical value range of the small hit judgment value) In the range, the range (60,000-60016 for setting value 2, 60,000-60035 for setting value 3 ... 60,000-60,109 for setting value 6) according to the setting value with 60,000 as a reference value is a big hit. It is set as a non-common numerical range of judgment values. Therefore, in the development environment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot probability can be changed only by changing the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value in accordance with the change of the set value, so that the development of the pachinko gaming machine relating to the set value The load can be reduced. Further, it is possible to reduce the processing load for the CPU 103 to determine whether or not to control the big hit game state and whether or not to control the small hit game state.

  In particular, for the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 can determine whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the same value of 60000 as the reference value regardless of the set value, so the CPU 103 is a jackpot. It is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control the game state.

  Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to 1, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is not set, so the CPU 103 sets the jackpot determination value Since it is only necessary to determine whether or not to control the big hit game state only in the common numerical value range, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether or not to control the big hit game state.

  Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value (common numerical range of the small hit determination value) is a common numerical value range or a non-common numerical value of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value. In a numerical value range different from the range, the numerical value range is set to be a continuous numerical value range (32767 to 33094) with 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). In other words, the numerical range of the small hitting determination value includes the same number of setting values regardless of the setting values, so that the CPU 103 has the same value regardless of the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hit game state with 32767 as the small hit reference value, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 for determining whether to control the small hit game state.

  In the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while it is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When 1 is set as the value, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is not set, and when 2 or more is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot determination value corresponding to each set value is set. Although the mode in which the non-common numerical value range is set is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when 1 is set as the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set. You may set it. In addition, when the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set even when 1 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, for example, as in FIGS. 45 and 46, the reference value is 1238. The range up to the value corresponding to each set value may be set as the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. Then, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value when 1 is set as the set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the smallest, and the jackpot determination value is increased as the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is increased. By expanding the non-common numerical value range, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, in the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the variation special figure is the first special figure, the range of 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value, When the variation special figure is the second special figure, the range of 32767 to 33421 is set as the common numerical value range of the small hit determination value. That is, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is set as a continuous numerical range with the same value as a reference, although the number of determination values included depending on the variation special map is set, and therefore the CPU 103 determines that Since it is possible to determine whether or not to control the small hitting game state with 32767, which is the same value in the case of 1 special map and the case of the second special map, as a reference value, whether to control the small hitting game state by the CPU 103 The processing load for determining whether or not it can be reduced.

  Note that in the forms shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as the lowest value of the non-common numerical value range, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value may be set as the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the CPU 103 determines that the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is within the common numerical value range or the non-common numerical value range of the big hit determination value. It is determined whether or not the big hit game state is controlled based on whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is based on whether or not the value of the random number value MR1 is within the common numerical range of the small hit determination value. Although a mode for determining whether or not to control to the small hit game state has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 changes to the big hit game state by a method other than that shown in the first embodiment. It may be determined whether or not to control or whether or not to control the small hitting game state. For example, the value of the random number MR1 may be calculated, and it may be determined whether to control the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the value of the calculation result. Further, the value of the random number MR1 is calculated, and the value of the calculation result exceeds a predetermined value (for example, 65535 which is the maximum value of the hit determination value) based on whether or not it is a big hit game state or a small hit game. It may be determined whether to control the state.

(Modification B: Modification regarding restoration of random number numerical data)
Next, a modified example B regarding the restoration of the numerical data of the random number value in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51. In Modified Example B, the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control side (also referred to as the sub side) is variable based on the numerical data of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination extracted by the CPU 103 on the game control side (also referred to as the main side). When the display can be executed, the CPU 103 outputs a specific command obtained by processing the numerical data of the random number value MR3 to the effect control CPU 120, and the effect control CPU 120 restores the numerical data of the random value MR3 from the received specific command. An example of controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display based on the restored numerical value data of the random number MR3 will be mainly described.

  On the side of the main board 11, as a random number value used by the CPU 103 for game control, a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a big hit type, a random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, and a normal figure display. The random number value MR4 for determining the result, the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, and the like are controlled to be countable. The random number values MR1 to MR5 may be updated by software by the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104 as a counter. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The CPU 103 outputs the numerical data of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result at the timing at which the start winning is detected at the first starting winning opening and the timing at which the starting winning at the second starting winning opening is detected. Extracted from the counter, based on the extracted numerical data, it is possible to make a hit judgment such as a big hit judgment, a small hit judgment etc. (including a stop pattern when the small hit is decided, a stop pattern when the lose is decided) is there. The CPU 103 outputs numerical data of the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination from the counter at the timing when the start winning a prize for the first starting winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning a prize for the second starting winning opening is detected. Based on the extracted numerical data, it is possible to make a jackpot type determination or the like (including a determination of a stop symbol for each jackpot type) to select and determine the jackpot type from a plurality of jackpot types. The CPU 103 extracts a random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination from a counter at the timing when the start winning a prize for the first starting winning opening is detected and the timing when the starting winning a prize for the second starting winning opening is detected. It is possible to process the extracted random number value MR3 and send it to the effect control CPU 120.

  The random number value MR1, the random number value MR2, and the random number value MR3 extracted at the timing when the start winning is detected are stored in the RAM 102 as suspension information (reservation data). Then, in the CPU 103, each of the hit determination based on the random number value MR1 and the jackpot type determination based on the random number value MR2, the start winning is detected in order for the effect control CPU 120 to execute the effect such as the hold prefetching notice effect. It is executed at the timing. The fluctuation pattern determination based on the random number value MR3 at the timing when the start winning is detected is not executed by the CPU 103, but is executed by restoring the processed random number value MR3 in the effect control CPU 120. After that, at the start timing of the variable display, in order to execute the variable display, based on such suspension information of the random number value MR1, the random number value MR2, and the random number value MR3, the winning / judging determination, the big hit type determination, etc. And the variation pattern determination is executed.

  In Modification B, when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, the jackpot type is set to be one of “non-probable variation” (normal jackpot) and “probable variation” (probability variation jackpot). To do.

  In the case of a normal big hit, after the big hit game state ends, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a low probability state (non-probability change state), it becomes a time saving state (high base state) . Such a gaming state is called a low certainty high base state. After such a time saving state is completed, it is controlled to a low base state (a control state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start winning port) in a low probability state (non-probability change state). Such a gaming state is called a low-probability low-base state. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the initial state is basically a low accuracy low base state.

  In the case of the probability variation big hit, after the termination of the big hit game state, a high probability state (probability variation state) and a time saving state (high base state) are set until a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed. Such a game state is called a high-accuracy high-base state. After the completion of such a highly accurate high base state, the low accurate low base state is controlled. In the case of a small hit, the game state does not change before and after the end of the small hit game state.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command in Modification B. In Modification B, command C3XXH, command F0XX, command F1XX, command F2XX, and command F3XX are added to the content of the effect control command described with reference to FIG.

  The command C3XXH is a symbol designating command that shows whether or not a big hit is included in the winning judgment results, and the judgment result of the type of big hit.

  The command F0XX, the command F1XX, the command F2XX, and the command F3XX are the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 which notify (transmit) the random number information of the random number MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination at the time of the start winning. Random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are used to transmit the numerical data of the random value MR3 by dividing it into four. The command F4XX is a variation pattern distribution state designating command (segmentation command capable of specifying the segment of the variable display pattern) for designating the distribution state of the variation pattern (variable display pattern) at the time of winning the start prize.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining processing regarding conversion and restoration of the variation pattern determination random value MR3 in Modification B. In the modified example B, the conversion process of the fluctuation pattern determination random value MR3 is executed in the main process by the CPU 103. A plurality of commands are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the conversion processing being executed by the CPU 103. Then, in the process on the sub side by the effect control CPU 120, the process of restoring the random number value MR3 is executed from the plurality of commands. Hereinafter, specific examples of these processes will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 48, it is assumed that “60000” is extracted as the fluctuation pattern determination random value MR3 (range of 0 to 65535). In such a case, in the processing on the main side by the CPU 103, a decimal number value is converted from (60000) D to (EA60) H into a hexadecimal number. Then, the value of each digit of the random number value MR3, which has become 4-digit numerical data (EA60) H after conversion into hexadecimal numbers, is divided into a plurality (4) and transmitted as random number transmission commands 1 to 4. To do. For example, by processing each digit of the random number value MR3, which is 4-digit numerical data of (EA60) H, into F0-00h, F1-06h, F2-0Ah, F3-0Eh, a plurality of (4 ) The commands 1 to 4 for transmitting the random number value are divided and transmitted.

  On the sub side that has received the plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4, the effect control CPU 120 takes out the lower bit (the underlined portion in FIG. 48) and determines (EA60) H to be (60000) D. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48, the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 are set as 0 × 160 + 6 × 161 + A × 162 + E × 163 = 0 × 1 + 6 × 16 + 10 × 256 + 14 × 4096 = 60000 from the numerical values of the extracted lower bits. Then, the random number value MR3 is restored as 60000. In this way, the random number value MR3 is restored by analyzing the plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order.

  When executing the pre-reading notice, it is possible to execute more kinds of pre-reading notice for the information on the fine variation pattern than for the coarse information only on the variation pattern type. However, if the main side determines the detailed information for determining the variation pattern, the capacity of the main side, which has a smaller capacity than the sub side, is pressed and the processing load increases. Therefore, by compressing the extracted fluctuation pattern determination random number value on the main side and transmitting it to the sub side, and by restoring the fluctuation pattern determination random number value on the sub side and then executing a pre-reading notice, the capacity of the main side is suppressed. Can be reduced.

  The fluctuation pattern command is a command for specifying a fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern). Therefore, the variation pattern command can be specified on the sub side, and pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

  Further, the extracted random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is converted from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number, and the converted value is divided into a plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4. Then, the plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 are collectively output from the main side to the sub side. As a result, the variation pattern command can be specified on the sub side, and pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the winning random number determination process (step S512) shown in FIG. 37 in the modified example B. In the winning random number determination process of the modified example B shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the probability variation flag or the like provided in the game control flag setting unit or the like to determine the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming state is specified (step Sc021). The CPU 103 may specify that the probability variation state is in the on state when the probability variation flag is on.

  Subsequent to the process of step Sc021, a process of identifying the variation pattern distribution state is executed (step Sc022). The variation pattern distribution state refers to a state in which the distribution of variation patterns as described below is selected.

  When the CPU 103 executes the variable display, the fluctuation pattern table in which the numerical data of the fluctuation pattern determination random number value MR3 is distributed corresponding to each of the plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns is used, and is extracted at the time of winning the start and stored as the reserved data. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the numerical data of MR3 read at the start of the variable display is selected and determined as the variation pattern to be executed.

  Regarding the fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of tables having different data contents (types of selectable fluctuation patterns and allocation of fluctuation pattern selection, etc.) are stored in the RAM 102 based on predetermined table selection conditions such as a variable display result and the number of pending storages. It is provided in a stored manner. For example, as the variation pattern table, there is a probability variation big hit time table used when the big hit is determined and the probability variation is determined, a non-probability variation big hit table is used when the big hit is determined and the non-certain variation is determined, and when the loss is determined and the number of pending storage is small (e.g. The reserved minority loss table used for 1 to 3 of the reserved data of Toku-zu 2 and the large number of pending loss to be used when the loss is determined and the number of held memories is large (for example, 4 held data of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2) It includes a time table, a basic loss time table that is used regardless of the number of reserved storages when determining a loss, and a small hit time table that is used when determining a small hit.

  Such a variation pattern table is categorized into a plurality of categories (sections) and stored in the RAM 102 according to a gaming state such as a state of a big hit probability, a state of a base, and a progress state of time saving control. For example, as the categories of the fluctuation pattern table, a first low-accuracy low base category, a second low-accuracy low base category, a first low-accuracy high base category, a second low-accuracy high-base category, a first high-accuracy high-base category, And, a second high term certainty base category is provided.

  The first low-probability low base category is when the variable display count executed during a period in which the low-probability low base state continues (a period that is initialized when a big hit occurs) is less than a predetermined number (for example, 200). This is the category of the fluctuation pattern table used for. The second low-accuracy low-base category is when the variable display count executed during a period in which the low-accuracy low-base state continues (a period that is initialized when a big hit occurs) is a predetermined number (for example, 200 times) or more. This is the category of the fluctuation pattern table used for.

  The first low-probability base category is a variation pattern table category used when the low-probability base state (time-saving state after non-probable variation big hit) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). The second low certainty high base category is a category of the variation pattern table used when the low certainty high base state (time-shortened state after non-certain variation big hit) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more.

  The first highly accurate high base category is a category of the fluctuation pattern table used when the highly accurate high base state (the positive variation state and the time reduction state after the positive variation big hit) is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). The second highly accurate high base category is a variation pattern table category used when the highly accurate high base state (the positive variation state and the short time state after the positive variation big hit) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) or more.

  In Modification B, an example will be described in which, with respect to the various variation pattern tables described above, different tables are set as selectable tables in the low base state (non-time saving state) and the high base state (time saving state). Note that the tables set as selectable tables may be the same in the low base state (non-time saving state) and the high base state (time saving state).

  Each of the first low-probability low base category and the second low-probability low base category is a combination of a table consisting of a probability variation big hit time table, a non-probability variation big hit time table, a reserved small number loss time table, and a small hit time table. A table configured and used for determining the variation pattern is selected according to the game state.

  Each of the first low-accuracy high-precision base category, the second low-accuracy high-accuracy base category, the first high-accuracy high-accuracy base category, and the second high-accuracy high-accuracy base category has a probability variation big hit table, non-probability variation big hit table, and basic loss. A table which is configured by a combination of a time table and a small hit time table, and which is used for determining the variation pattern is selected according to the game state.

  As described above, the variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern when executing the variable display is provided for each category according to the gaming state. Therefore, in order to selectively determine the variation pattern when executing the variable display, based on the game state when executing the variable display, the variation pattern table according to the game state classified (divided) as described above. Specify the category of. Then, from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in association with the identified category, a variation pattern according to a gaming state including a big hit determination result, a big hit type determination result, a small hit determination result, and the number of reserved memories. A table is selected, and using the selected fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern used for variable display is determined based on the numerical data of the fluctuation pattern determination random value MR3 read from the pending data.

  In step Sc022, as a process of identifying the variation pattern distribution state, it is included in the current game state identified in step Sc021, and based on the data of the game state used to identify the category of the variation pattern table, The process of specifying the category of the fluctuation pattern table is performed.

  Next, in order to specify the category of the variation pattern table as the variation pattern distribution state identified in step Sc022, the setting for transmitting the variation pattern distribution state designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step Sc023). By receiving the variation pattern distribution state designation command at the time of the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes the category of the variation pattern determination random value MR3 included in the hold data corresponding to the start winning at the time of the start winning. can do.

  Next, from the table data forming the first special figure display result determination table or the second special figure display result determination table, the special opening corresponding to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state are specified. The special figure display result determination table data used for determining the figure display result is selected (step Sc024). The first special figure display result determination table, before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure is derived and displayed, the variable display result is set as a "big hit" and the big hit game state is set. In a table referred to for determining whether to control or not, whether to control the small display game state as a small display with a variable display result based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. is there. The second special figure display result determination table, before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game using the second special figure is derived and displayed, the variable display result is set as a "big hit" and the big hit game state is set. In a table referred to for determining whether to control or not, whether to control the small display game state as a small display with a variable display result based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. is there.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, a numerical value (determination) that is compared with the random number value MR1 depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probable variation state. The range of (value) is assigned to the special figure display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “miss”.

  In each of the first special figure display result determination table and the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), the number of game states is larger than that in the normal state (low probability state). The determined value is assigned to the special jackpot display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability variation state, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “big hit” and being controlled in the big hit game state is higher than in the normal state.

  It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is within the jackpot determination range (within the jackpot determination range) (step Sc025). As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a "big hit" based on the variable display based on the hold data.

  When it is determined in step Sc025 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step Sc025; No), the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37 is within the small hit determination range (small. It is determined whether or not it is within the hit determination range (step Sc026). As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a "small hit" based on the variable display based on the hold data.

  If the random number value MR1 is not within the small hitting determination range in step Sc026 (step Sc026; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “miss” is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Settings are made (step Sc027). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “00H”. The symbol designating command is based on the judgment result by the hit / miss judgment such as the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment at the time of starting winning, in addition to the judgment result of the hit / miss judgment such as the big hit, the small hit, and the loss, the judgment result of the big hit type. Is a command that can indicate.

  If the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range in step Sc026 (step Sc026; Yes), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission (step Sc006). As an example, the CPU 103 may set a command table or the like for setting the EXT data in the symbol designating command to “03H”.

  When it is a big hit in step Sc025 (step Sc025; Yes), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type (step Sc028). At this time, the CPU 103 corresponds to the starting opening buffer value which is data capable of distinguishing between the "first special figure" and the "second special figure" when the pending data is stored at the time of winning the start winning. According to the fluctuation special map ("1 special map" corresponding to "1" or "2nd special map" corresponding to "2") specified from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table Select the jackpot type determination table data corresponding to the special drawing. The jackpot type determination table is a table referred to for determining the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types such as “non-probable variation” and “probable variation” based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. The table data corresponding to "1 special figure" and the table data corresponding to "2nd special figure" are provided, and the fluctuation special chart (variable display special chart specified corresponding to the starting port buffer value is provided. ), One of the data tables is selected and used for the jackpot type determination.

  Next, the setting for transmitting the symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of step Sc028 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step Sc029). As an example, when it is determined in step Sc028 that the jackpot type is determined to be the "probable variation" jackpot, the EXT data in the symbol designating command is set to "01H", and the jackpot type is determined to be a "non-probable variation" jackpot. When it is determined that the EXT data in the symbol designating command is "02H".

  After performing any one of the processes of step Sc027, step Sc030, and step Sc029, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 is read from the reserved data extracted in step S509 of FIG. 37, and as described in FIG. The numerical data of is converted from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number, and the value of each digit of the converted hexadecimal number data is divided into a plurality of random value transmission commands 1 to 4 (processing of the numerical data). (Step Sc031). Then, the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 divided in step Sc031 are set to be collectively transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step Sc032). Thereby, the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 processed from the numerical data of MR3 are transmitted by the command control process of step S27 in FIG.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process executed when a specific condition regarding the look-ahead effect is satisfied as the command analysis process (step S75) shown in FIG. 7 in Modification B. The effect control CPU 120 performs a process of analyzing the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 transmitted by the CPU 103 in step Sc032 of FIG. 49 in the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process.

  The specific condition regarding the prefetching effect for executing the prefetching variation pattern command analysis process is the following condition. When the start winning is generated, of the effect control commands shown in FIG. 47, the first starting winning prize winning designation command or the second starting winning prize winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation pattern distribution state designation command, the first hold memory A plurality of types of commands, that is, the number notification command, the second reserved storage number notification command, and the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are transmitted at the same time. In the effect control CPU 120, in the command analysis processing in step S75 of FIG. 7, at least one of the plurality of types of commands transmitted when such a start winning occurs is received. 50 is executed on the condition that the confirmation is performed based on the data of the command stored in the command receiving buffer. As described above, the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis process is an analysis process executed at the time when the start winning is generated.

  In the look-ahead variation pattern command analysis processing, by checking the command data stored in the effect control command reception buffer, all the commands for the random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 collectively transmitted in step Sc032 are executed. Is received (step Sc041). When it is determined that all the commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random value are received, the random pattern analysis is performed by analyzing the variation pattern commands divided and transmitted by the commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random value in a predetermined order. The module (subroutine) is executed (step Sc042). In the random number analysis module, the sub-side performs the restoration process described as the process for restoring the variation pattern determination random number value MR3, thereby changing the random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 that have been divided and transmitted. The random value MR3 for pattern determination can be restored.

  Next, the random number analysis module (step Sc042) determines whether or not the random number value MR3 has been restored normally (step Sc043). In step Sc043, for example, when the restored numerical value data of the random number value MR3 is the numerical value data of the predetermined random number range (0 to 65535), the numerical value MR3 is normally restored. To be judged. That is, when the numerical value of the abnormal state is outside the predetermined possible numerical range, it is determined to be abnormal.

  When it is determined in step Sc043 that the random number value MR3 has been restored normally, by confirming the command data stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the variation pattern distribution set in step Sc023 of FIG. 49 is set. It is determined whether the state designation command has been received (step Sc044). When it is determined in step Sc044 that the variation pattern distribution state designation command is received, the category of the variation pattern table designated by the received variation pattern distribution state designation command is specified (step Sc045). As a result, the categories of the fluctuation pattern table stored in the RAM 122 (first low-accuracy low base category, second low-accuracy low base category, first low-accuracy high base category, second low-accuracy high-base category, first high-accuracy high-base category, From the high-base category and the second high-term certainty-high base category), the category of the variation pattern table used for selecting and determining the variation pattern for the look-ahead production is selected.

  Next, by confirming the command data stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, it is determined whether or not the symbol designating command to be transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the occurrence of the start winning is received. (Step Sc046). When it is determined in step Sc046 that the symbol designating command has been received, the number of pending storages transmitted is confirmed, and from the variation pattern tables within the category of the variation pattern table specified in step Sc045, variation relating to look-ahead rendering A variation pattern table used for pattern selection determination is selected.

  Next, using the variation pattern table identified in step Sc046, the variation pattern relating to the prefetch effect is selected and determined based on the numerical data of the random number value MR3 restored by the random number analysis module (step Sc042). (Step Sc047). Then, the variation pattern specified in step Sc047 is set as a command for designating the variation control pattern 120 relating to the rendering effect to the effect control CPU 120 by storing the variation command in advance in the variation command storage area of the RAM 122 (step). Sc048), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step Sc041 that at least one of the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 has not been received (when only some commands have been received, when no commands have been received, etc.). (Step Sc041), when it is determined that the random number value MR3 has not been normally restored in step Sc043, and when it is determined in step Sc046 that the symbol designating command has not been received, the start winning is performed. Since this is a case where an abnormality occurs in the production control command that is transmitted at some time, the prefetch variation error command is a prefetch variation error command storage area of the RAM 122 as a command for designating the production control CPU 120 that the abnormality has occurred. Set in memory (step Sc049), and the process ends. To.

  51 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed as the prefetching advance notice setting process (step S161) shown in FIG. 8 in the modification B. In the prefetch advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the command in the storage area of the RAM 122 set in the prefetch variation pattern command analysis process (step Sc061). Then, the storage area set this time and the entire other storage area of the RAM 122 are checked to determine whether or not there is a prefetch variation error command (step Sc062). The prefetch variation error command is a command set in step Sc049 of FIG. 50 and is set when the command cannot be received normally or the random number value cannot be restored normally. If there is a read-ahead change error command in the storage area of the RAM 122 (step Sc062; Y), it is set so that the read-ahead notice is not executed until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the read-ahead notice error command is completed (step S062; Sc067), and the process ends.

  If the prefetching advance notice error command is stored, even if the storage information that occurs after that storage information is normal, the prefetching advance notice is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the storage information of the prefetching advance notice error command ends. You can set it not to execute. Then, the prefetching advance notice may be permitted by the reception of the normal command after the variable display corresponding to the storage information of the prefetching advance notice error command is completed. Further, instead of checking the entire storage area of the RAM 122, it may be determined only by whether or not the command set this time is an error. Even in that case, the pre-reading notice may be limited until the variable display corresponding to the stored information of the command in error ends.

  In step Sc062, when there is no prefetching change error command (step Sc062; N), it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice can be executed (step Sc063). For example, the storage area of the RAM 122 is checked, and it is determined that the prefetching notice is not executable when the prefetching notice effect has already been executed or in the big hit game state. It should be noted that the prefetching notice effect may be executed in these cases as well. If it is determined in step Sc063 that the prefetching notice cannot be executed, it is set in step Sc067 so that the prefetching notice is not executed, and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step Sc063 that the pre-reading notice can be executed (step Sc063; Y), the pre-reading notice is drawn based on the pre-reading variation command set by the pre-reading variation pattern command analysis process described in FIG. (Step Sc064). For example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice by the pre-reading variation command, and when executing the pre-reading notice, the details of the effect content of the pre-reading notice effect are determined.

  Next, in the process of step Sc065, it is determined whether or not the prefetching advance notice is determined to be executed. When it is determined in step Sc065 that the prefetching notice has not been executed (step Sc065; N), the process ends. When it is determined in step Sc065 that the prefetching notice has been executed (step Sc065; Y), the decided prefetching notice is executed (step Sc066), and the process ends. As a result, the effect control corresponding to the variable display is executed based on the random number value MR3 restored in step Sc042 from the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 obtained by processing the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It should be noted that step Sc066 includes not executing the determined prefetching notice immediately but executing it at a predetermined timing (for example, timing at the start of fluctuation or timing during fluctuation).

  The case has been described in which the prefetching advance notice is set not to be executed when there is a prefetching variation error command in the storage area of the RAM 122 (step Sc062; Y). It may be determined whether or not there is a variation error command, and if there is a variation error command in advance, it may be set so as to limit the execution of the preliminary notice that is determined by lottery.

(Effects etc. of Modification B)
As described above, the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 processed from the numerical data of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination in step Sc031 of FIG. 49 are command control of step Sc032 of FIG. 49 and step S27 of FIG. Sent by processing. Then, in step Sc042 of FIG. 50, the random number value MR3 is restored from the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 obtained by processing the MR3, and in step Sc066 of FIG. 51, variable display is performed based on the restored random number value MR3. Corresponding effect control is executed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side as a game control means such as the CPU 103.

  Also, the effect control command which is transmitted by the CPU 103 after being processed in step Sc031 of FIG. 49 and which is restored by the effect control CPU 120 in step Sc042 of FIG. The commands 1 to 4 are commands that can specify variation patterns. As a result, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side as a game control means such as the CPU 103.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are commands configured by converting the extracted random value M3 from decimal to hexadecimal and dividing the converted value into a plurality of commands. Yes, a plurality of commands are collectively output by step Sc032 of FIG. 49 and step S27 of FIG. In this way, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side as the effect control means such as the effect control CPU 120 by collectively outputting a plurality of commands, the pressure on the main side capacity such as the CPU 103 is reduced. can do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the random number value MR3 is restored by analyzing the plurality of random number value transmission commands 1 to 4 in a predetermined order in step Sc043 of FIG. Then, as shown in step Sc048 of FIG. 50, the look-ahead variation command corresponding to the variation pattern command based on the restored random number value MR3 is stored. As a result, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side using the variable display pattern command based on the random number value MR3 restored on the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120. The pressure can be reduced.

  Further, by the step Sc022, the step Sc023 of FIG. 49, and the step S27 of FIG. 5, on the main side such as the CPU 103, the variation pattern distribution state designation capable of specifying the division of the variable display pattern such as the category of the variation pattern table is specified. The command is output to the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120. As a result, the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by outputting a command capable of specifying the category (division of the variable display pattern) of the fluctuation pattern table, so that it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side. .

  Further, as shown in step Sc027, step Sc029, and step Sc030 of FIG. 49, on the main side such as the CPU 103, it is possible to specify whether or not to control in an advantageous state advantageous to the player such as a big hit game state. The specified command is output as a command different from the variation pattern distribution state specification command. As a result, the information regarding the most important result of winning / judging (the result of large hit determination, the result of small hit determination) is specified by the main side such as the CPU 103 and is output to the sub side such as the CPU 120 for effect control, so that the safety is enhanced. You can Further, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by transmitting the symbol designating command, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side.

  Further, in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in steps Sc045 and Sc047 of FIG. 50, a table for determining the variable display pattern is specified based on the variation pattern distribution state designation command and the symbol designation command, As shown in step Sc048 of FIG. 50 and step Sc066 of FIG. 51, the production corresponding to the variable display is controlled based on the specified table and the restored random number value for fluctuation pattern determination MR3. As a result, since the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled from the table set based on the variation pattern distribution state designation command and the symbol designation command and the restored random number value MR3, pressure on the capacity on the main side is reduced. can do.

  In addition, as shown in step Sc066 of FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 executes, as an effect corresponding to the variable display, a look-ahead effect related to the variable display that triggers the transmission of the variation pattern distribution state designation command. As a result, the look-ahead effect related to the variable display is executed by the variable display pattern being specified on the sub side such as the effect control CPU 120, so that the pressure on the main side capacity such as the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  In Modification B, the case where the random number transmission commands 1 to 4 are collectively transmitted in step Sc032 of FIG. 49 has been described. However, the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 may be transmitted one by one, instead of being transmitted all at once. Further, if some abnormality occurs during the transmission and all the commands cannot be transmitted, the command relating to the error information may be transmitted, or the game may be stopped.

  In Modification B, it has been described that the look-ahead variation command is set in step Sc048 and the look-ahead variation error command is set in step Sc049 of FIG. However, by transmitting a prefetching variation command according to the variation pattern analyzed by one device to another device, execution of the prefetching advance notice may be determined in the transmitted device.

  In Modification B, a case has been described in which it is determined in step Sc063 in FIG. 51 whether or not the prefetching notice can be executed. However, in step Sc063, when the pending information stored before the determination is executed includes the variable display pending information that reaches, it may be determined not to execute the prefetching notice. Further, even if the variable display hold information for reach is stored, the prefetching notice may be executed according to the type of the prefetching notice to be executed. For example, if the pre-reading notice to be executed is due to the pending change, the pre-reading notice due to the pending change may be executed even when the variable hold information for reach is stored.

  Further, in the modified example B, a plurality of methods of processing the variation pattern determination random value MR3 may be provided. Then, the MR 3 may be restored by transmitting information on the processing method of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination from the main side to the sub side.

  In Modification B, the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination is set in the range of 0 to 65535. However, the range of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination may be a range smaller or larger than this range.

  In Modification B, during the special symbol normal process, the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 is processed in the same manner as at the time of starting winning, and the random value transmission commands 1 to 4 are transmitted from the main side, and the sub side is transmitted. The fluctuation pattern may be specified by performing a random number restoration process.

(Modification C: Modification in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the common storage area)
Further, in the first embodiment, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set separately in the game control flag setting unit 152 (that is, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set in different storage areas). However, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the big hit flag and the small hit flag may not be set in separate storage areas, but may be set in a common storage area to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side (main board 11). . An example in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the common storage area will be described below as a modification C of the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 52.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing in Modification C. Note that, in FIG. 52, portions different from the special symbol normal processing of the first embodiment described in FIG. 39 will be extracted and described. In Modification C, both when the big hit flag is set and when the small hit flag is set, it is set in the common storage area of the game control flag setting unit 152, but this common storage area This is called a common buffer, and the flag (big hit flag or small hit flag) set in the common buffer is called a common flag. In Modification C, the big hit flag or the small hit flag is determined based on the value (“1” or “2”) of the common flag set in the common buffer.

  After executing the process of step S557 described above with reference to FIG. 39, the CPU 103 resets (erases) the stored content of the common buffer (step S557A). Specifically, the value indicating "0" is overwritten as the value of the common flag set in the common buffer. As will be described later, the value “0” of the common flag is also a value indicating “out”.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it is determined to be a big hit in the variable display in the process of step S557 (step S557B), and when it is determined to be a big hit (step S557B; Y), is set in the common buffer. The value indicating "1" is overwritten as the value of the common flag (step S557C). Therefore, if the value of the common flag is "1", it means "big hit", and it can be said that the common flag "1" is big hit flag.

  When it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S557B; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether it is a small hit in the variable display in the process of step S557 (step S557D), and determines that it is a small hit. In this case (step S557D; Y), the value indicating "2" is overwritten as the value of the common flag set in the common buffer (step S557E). Therefore, the fact that the value of the common flag is “2” indicates that it is a “small hit”, and it can be said that the common flag “2” is a small hit flag.

  When it is determined that it is not a small hit (step S557D; N), the CPU 103 overwrites the value indicating “0” as the value of the common flag set in the common buffer (step S557F). Therefore, the value of the common flag being “0” indicates “out”. Since the value of the common flag is set to "0" by resetting the common buffer in step S557A, "0" may not be set again (that is, the process of step S557F is not executed). .

  After performing the processing of step S557E, after performing the processing of step S557F, or after performing the processing of step S557C and then performing the processing of steps S562 to S564 described with reference to FIG. The confirmed special symbol is stored in a predetermined storage area in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S557G). At this time, when the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "0", the CPU 103 stores the information "off symbol" as the confirmed special symbol, and the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is "1". ", When the value of the common flag stored in the common buffer is" 2 ", the information of" small hit "is stored as the fixed special symbol. In any case, the information of any fixed special symbol is stored in the common storage area (the same area) in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In addition, the information of the fixed special symbol is not limited to the information of the symbol type such as "outward symbol", "big hit symbol", "small hit symbol", and may be the information of the symbol random number, or the lottery result based on the symbol random number Information, or a random number for display used for segment display (display in the game information display unit 200).

  After executing the process of step S557G, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S566 and S567 described above with reference to FIG. 39 and ends the special symbol normal process.

(Effects etc. of Modification C)
As described above, in Modification C, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are determined by the value of the common flag and stored in the common buffer. Therefore, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are separately provided in different storage areas. It is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side rather than storing it. In addition, the LD command and the like can be reduced as compared with LD (loading) a separate big hit flag and small hit flag, and therefore pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced. In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the setting function described in the first embodiment, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is compressed due to the setting function. Therefore, Modification C is more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having such a setting function.

  In Modification C, the big hit flag (common flag “1”) and the small hit flag (common flag “2”) are determined by the value of the common flag and stored in the common buffer, so that both are set at the same time. Things can't happen. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the risk of bugs in the gaming machine and risk of goto.

  In Modification C, as shown in the process of step S557G, the fixed special symbol information is also stored in the common storage area. Can be reduced.

  In Modification C, in the special symbol normal process, depending on whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit, the common buffer big hit flag (common flag "1") or the small hit flag (common flag " 2 ”) is set, the prefetch determination result is common when the process for prefetching the variable display result in the start winning determination process of step S101 shown in FIG. 6 is performed (prefetch determination process). It may not be stored in the buffer. In other words, in the prefetch determination process, even if the variable display result is prefetched, the information of the prefetch determination result is controlled without setting a common flag (big hit flag, small hit flag, etc.) based on the determination result in the common buffer. It may be transmitted to the substrate 12 (sub side). By doing so, since the risk that the common flag is mixedly set in the special symbol normal process and the prefetch determination process is reduced, the risk of bugs and irregularities can be reduced.

  In Modification C, as shown in step S557A, the value of the common flag is stored in the common buffer before the value of the common flag is set based on the determination whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. The value of the common flag is reset (reset to the value "0" indicating the deviation). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common buffer.

  In Modification C, as shown in steps S557B and S557D, it is first determined whether or not to be a big hit, and when it is determined to be a big hit, it is not determined whether or not to be a small hit. Therefore, the program can be compressed by omitting useless processing. In Modification C, whether or not a big hit is determined first is determined, and when it is determined that a big hit is determined, it is not determined whether or not a small hit is determined. It is not necessary to determine whether or not it is a big hit when it is determined that it is a small hit.

  In the modification C, the common flag stored in the common buffer (the value "1" indicating a big hit, the value "2" indicating a small hit, or the value "0" indicating a loss) is used in the special symbol normal process. Although it is assumed that (for example, it is used when determining the type of the fixed special symbol in step S557G), it can be used for other processing. For example, the variation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 6 includes a process of determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination of whether the variable display result is a big hit or a small hit. However, the common buffer may be referred to in this determination. Similarly, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 6, the game state is updated based on whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game. Processing for terminating the time saving state and the probability variation state) is included, but the common buffer may be referred to at the time of this determination. In this way, since the information of the common flag set in the common buffer can be used in a plurality of processes, it is possible to further enhance the compression effect of the capacity on the main side.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a setting function capable of setting a set value as described in the first embodiment, but has a configuration in which the setting function is added to a so-called type 1 type 2 type gaming machine. May be It is to be noted that a gaming machine with specifications of 1 type and 2 types is a big hit (so-called first hit) as a result of the first special figure game in a normal state (low base state), so that a time saving state (high It is controlled to a base state), and a small hit occurs as a result of the second special drawing game in the time saving state, and the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in the small hit game state. It is a gaming machine that has the game characteristics of being a big hit (so-called continuous play). At this time, the winning probability of the big hit in the special figure game (the first special figure game and the second special figure game) is made different according to the set value, while the special figure game (at least the second special figure game is performed regardless of the set value. The winning probabilities of small hits in the (figure game) may be the same. In this way, at the time of the first win, the probability of being a big hit will be affected by the difference in the set value, but since the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the set value, the big hit due to the difference in the set value at the time of condominium There is no influence on the probability that (when passing a predetermined switch during a small hit). Therefore, even if there is a high possibility of low setting in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a setting function, it is possible to reduce the influence of the difference in setting value and maintain the interest of the game. Further, in the gaming machine of the type 1 type and the type 2 equipped with such a setting function, the frequency of small hits increases in the time-saving state after the initial hit. Therefore, by applying the modification C to such a type 1 type 2 type gaming machine, even if the frequency of small hits is high, a small hit flag different from the big hit flag is LD ( Since it is not necessary to load), it is possible to reduce LD instructions and the like, and it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side.

  Note that the modification C is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, but may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modifications A and B. It can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment described later.

(Modification D: Modification in which timer update processing is shared)
Further, in the first embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating a plurality of types of timer values, but the timer updating process for updating (subtracting) the set timer value is performed by a plurality of timer updating processes. The processing may be executed as a common processing so that the processing can be used. As a modified example D of the first embodiment, an example in which the timer update process is shared will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control timer interrupt process in the modification D. Note that, in FIG. 53, portions different from the game control timer interrupt processing described in FIG. 5 are extracted and described.

  After executing the processes of steps S21 to S24 described above with reference to FIG. 5, the CPU 103 executes the timer updating process of subtracting the set timer value (step S25A). The data indicating the timer value is set in each process described later (for example, fluctuation pattern setting process, special symbol fluctuation process or special symbol stop process), so that a plurality of types of timer values are set in the game control timer setting unit 153. However, the timer updating process for subtracting the timer value is performed in common by the timer updating process of step S25A for any timer value. After executing the process of step S25A, the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S25 to S27 described above with reference to FIG. 5 and ends the game control timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in Modification D. Note that, in FIG. 54, portions different from the special symbol process processing described in FIG. 6 will be extracted and described.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 103 executes the second zero flag updating process before executing the process of step S101 described with reference to FIG. 6 (step S100). Specifically, the CPU 103 updates the second zero flag by reading the timer value updated in the timer updating process (step S25A) of FIG. Here, the second zero flag is a flag that is updated to "1" when the read value (data) is "0", and the content of the second zero flag is updated by the subroutine read by the Call instruction, The contents are retained even after returning to the original processing. Therefore, the second zero flag is updated to "1" when the timer value updated (subtracted) in the timer update process becomes "0". In Modification D, the second zero flag is updated instead of the zero flag by reading the timer value, but this is for the following reason. That is, since the zero flag is a flag indicating whether or not the operation result is “0”, the operation for updating the zero flag has more codes than the LD (load) instruction for updating the second zero flag. Therefore, in Modification D, the processing is compressed by updating the second zero flag instead of the zero flag. Although the compression effect is reduced, the zero flag may be updated by calculation instead of updating the second zero flag by reading the timer value.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (see step S111 in FIG. 6) in the modification D.

  In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1111). When the big hit flag is set (step S1111; Y), the CPU 103 determines the big hit variation pattern using the big hit variation pattern determination table (step S1112).

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S1111; N), the CPU 103 confirms whether the small hit flag is set (step S1113). When the small hit flag is set (step S1113; Y), the CPU 103 determines the small hit variation pattern using the small hit variation pattern determination table (step S1114). When the small hit flag is not set (step S1113; N), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern for the deviation by using the variation pattern determination table for the deviation (step S1115).

  After the processing of step S1112, S1114, or S1115, the CPU 103 issues a design variation designation command (production control command) indicating that variable display of special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Control to transmit to 12 is performed (step S1116).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern designation command (effect control command) that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined in the process of step S1112, S1114, or S1115 to the effect control board 12 (step S1117). ).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time as data indicating the timer value of the special figure fluctuation time timer (step S1118). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (see step S112 in FIG. 6) (step S1119), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (see step S112 in FIG. 6) in Modification D.

  In the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the second zero flag is 1 (step S1121). As described above, for the second zero flag, when the timer value updated by the timer updating process (step S25A of FIG. 53) becomes “0”, the second zero flag updating process (step S100 of FIG. 54) is executed. By doing so, it is updated to "1". Therefore, the value of the second zero flag being "1" means that the timer value has become "0" (timed out).

  In the process of step S1121 of the special symbol variation process, the timer value for determining whether or not it has become “0” (timed out) is the process before the transition to the special symbol variation process (the special symbol process flag is 2). This is the timer value (variation time) set in the variation pattern setting process (see FIG. 55) which is the process before being updated (see step S1118). However, this timer value (fluctuation time) is updated (subtracted) by executing the timer update process (see step S25A) in the game control timer interrupt process (see FIG. 53) instead of the special symbol variation process. .. Therefore, regardless of which process (for example, the special symbol variation process) is the timer value used (that is, the type of the timer), the timer value can be updated by the common timer update process. Further, the second zero flag update process for updating the second zero flag (see step S100) is executed in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54) that can call the special symbol variation process as a subroutine. Therefore, the process can be compressed rather than updating the second zero flag in each subroutine called in the special symbol process process (for example, the special symbol variation process).

  If the second zero flag is 1 (that is, the timer value (variation time) has timed out (step S1121; Y)), the CPU 103 ends the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second. Control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol display device 4B (step S1122), if the second zero flag is not 1 (that is, if the timer value (variation time) has not timed out (step S1121; N)), The CPU 103 ends the special symbol variation process.

  After the process of step S1122, the CPU 103 controls to send to the effect control board 12 a symbol determination designation command (effect control command) indicating that variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is stopped. Is performed (step S1123).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as data indicating the timer value of the special figure fluctuation stop time timer (step S1124). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (see step S113 in FIG. 6) (step S1125), and the special symbol variation process is ended.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (see step S113 in FIG. 6) in Modification D.

  In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the second zero flag is 1 (step S1131). As described above, for the second zero flag, when the timer value updated by the timer updating process (step S25A of FIG. 53) becomes “0”, the second zero flag updating process (step S100 of FIG. 54) is executed. By doing so, it is updated to "1". Therefore, the value of the second zero flag being "1" means that the timer value has become "0" (timed out).

  In the process of step S1131 of the special symbol stop process, the timer value for determining whether or not it has become “0” (timed out) is the process before the special symbol stop process (the special symbol process flag is 3). It is a timer value (symbol fixing time) set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 56) which is a process before being updated to (see step S1124). However, this timer value (symbol fixing time) is not updated by special timer stop processing (see step S25A) in the game control timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 53), not by special symbol stop processing. It Therefore, regardless of which process (for example, the special symbol stop process) is the timer value used (that is, the type of the timer), the timer value can be updated by the common timer update process. Further, the second zero flag update process for updating the second zero flag (see step S100) is executed in the special symbol process process (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 54) that can call the special symbol stop process as a subroutine. Therefore, the process can be compressed rather than updating the second zero flag in each subroutine (for example, the special symbol stop process) called in the special symbol process process.

  When the second zero flag is 1 (that is, when the timer value (fluctuation time) has timed out (step S1131; Y)), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S1132), If the 2 zero flag is not 1 (that is, if the timer value (variation time) has not timed out (step S1131; N)), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S1132; Y), the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state and the time saving flag indicating the time reduction state (high base state). For example, the flag is reset (step S1133), and control for transmitting a hit start designation command (effect control command) for specifying the start of the big hit game state to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S1134).

  After the processing of S1134, the CPU 103 sets the time at which the fanfare effect is executed, as data indicating the timer value of the fanfare time timer (step S1135). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the big hit opening preprocessing (see step S114 of FIG. 6) (step S1136), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S1132; N), the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S1137), and when the small hit flag is set (step S1137). ; Y), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a small hit start designation command (effect control command) for specifying the start of the small hit game state to the effect control board 12 (step S1138).

  After the process of S1138, the CPU 103 sets the time when the fanfare game effect of the small hit game is executed as the data indicating the timer value of the fanfare game time timer of the small hit game (step S1139). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (see step S118 of FIG. 6) (step S1140), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

  When the small hit flag is not set (step S1137; N), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S1141). If the probability variation flag is set (step S1141; Y), the process proceeds to step S1147, and if the probability variation flag is not set (step S1141; N), the CPU 103 determines that the time saving state is set. It is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag shown is set (step S1142). If the time saving flag is not set (step S1142; N), the process proceeds to step S1147, and if the time saving flag is set (step S1142; Y), the number of fluctuations of the special symbol in the time saving state is possible. The value of the hour / hour counter that indicates is decremented by 1 (step S1143). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the hour / hour counter is 0 (step S1144), and if the value of the hour / hour counter is not 0 (step S1144; N), the process is step S1147. When the value of the hour / hour counter reaches 0 (step S1144; Y), the hour / hour flag is reset (step S1145), and the gaming state (low base state, normal state) in which hour / hour control is not performed is performed. The control for transmitting the corresponding first game state designation command (production control command) to the production control board 12 is performed (step S1146). Then, in the process of step S1147, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (see step S110 of FIG. 6), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

(Effects of Modification D, etc.)
As described above, in the modified example D, in the plurality of processes in which the special symbol variation process and the special symbol stop process are different, the process is executed based on the second zero flag, and the second zero flag is a basis for update. Although the timer value is different in each of the plurality of processes, all of them are updated by the common timer updating process executed before the plurality of processes. That is, in the modification D, the timer value used in a plurality of processes can be updated by one common process (timer updating process of FIG. 53), so that the process can be compressed and the main side (main board 11). ) The pressure on the capacity can be reduced.

  In Modification D, as a plurality of processes in which the timer value updated by the common timer update process (or the second zero flag updated based on the timer value) is used, the special symbol variation process and the special symbol variation process are performed. Although the example of the symbol stopping process has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used in the big hit opening pre-process (S114), the big hit opening process (S115) and the like shown in FIG. Also in this case, as in the modification D, the timer value for determining whether or not it has become “0” (timed out) in each process is the process before shifting to each process (for example, before jackpot opening). If it is a process, it is set in a special symbol stop process), and each process is executed based on the timer value being updated by one common process (timer updating process in FIG. 53).

  Further, in Modification D, as the timer value updated by the timer updating process of FIG. 53, the special figure variation time timer, the special figure stop time timer, and the like are mentioned, but the invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the normal figure variable time timer to measure the execution time of the variable display of the normal symbol, the security signal output timer to measure the output time of the security signal, the payout control communication timer, and the constant drive A plurality of types of timer values such as a motor monitoring timer may be updated by a common timer update process. In this way, by updating multiple types of timer values in the common timer update process, the updated multiple types of timer values can be used in multiple processes, so the process can be compressed more and It is possible to reduce pressure on the side (main substrate 11) capacitance.

  In Modification D, the special symbol variation process and the special symbol stop process can be called as subroutines, respectively, in the special symbol process process (see FIGS. 6 and 54), which is updated by the timer updating process (see FIG. 53). The second zero flag is updated by reading the timer value (the second zero flag updating process of FIG. 54 is executed), and different processing depending on whether the value of the second zero flag is “1” (for example, special In the symbol variation process, a stop symbol is derived and displayed, or the process is looped (standby)). In this way, instead of updating the second zero flag in each process called by the subroutine (special symbol variation process or special symbol stop process), the second zero flag is updated by the process of the calling source (special symbol process process), Since the updated information of the second zero flag is used in the plurality of processes called by the subroutine, the processes can be compressed and the pressure on the main side (main board 11) capacity can be reduced.

  The modified example D may be applied to a gaming machine having specifications of one type and two types. As described above, in the type 1 and type 2 specification gaming machines, the frequency of small hits increases in the time-saving state after the first hit, so in the special symbol process processing, a subroutine related to small hits (pre-small hit opening processing, The frequency of calling the small hitting open process and the small hit ending process becomes high (see FIG. 6). Therefore, by applying the modification D to such a type 1 type 2 type gaming machine, even if the frequency of calling the subroutine related to the small hit is high, the timer value used in the subroutine is one. Since the update is performed by the timer update process, the compression efficiency of the process is increased, and the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

  Note that the modification C is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment, but may be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modifications A and B. It can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a second embodiment described later.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description will be described. In the second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function capable of setting a set value and capable of controlling in a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely than in a normal state will be described.

  First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58-1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description described above with reference to FIG. 1 in that the configurations of the special variable winning ball device 7 and the variable winning ball device 6B are different and new. It is different in that a special variable winning ball device 17 is provided. The different points will be described below.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening is provided below the passage gate 41. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down forward and backward to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed into an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. Special variable winning ball device 7, in the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it has been moved forward toward the rear, and opening control is executed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

  Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port are provided. As shown in -1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the gaming ball to win (also called an open state) and the gaming ball cannot win the winning state (also called a closed state). Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit pattern) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which it is moved forward toward the front, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state where the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second start winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

  In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Also, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed such that the bottom member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so the game dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the ball moves from the upper left to the lower right on the special variable winning ball device 7 and drops onto the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is directed from the upper right to the lower left. Move on. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special variable winning ball device 7. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped on 6B wins the second starting winning opening and is a special variable. The game ball does not flow toward the winning ball device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

  Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared with the case without the restriction piece.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 58-1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the special winning ball device 6B receives the special variable winning. Since the game balls flow toward the ball device 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

  Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch capable of detecting a game ball that has won the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the switch, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, the player is in an advantageous state. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, it is not possible to pass the game ball to the special winning opening (entry) to obtain the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

  Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch capable of detecting the game ball that has won the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the switch, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening which has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot get the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. You will be at a disadvantage.

  Next, a game state in the second embodiment will be described. The gaming state in the second embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) that is more likely to be a small hit than the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT state, a first KT state and a second KT state, and a gaming state is a case where a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state) are controlled. , Low probability and controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state), high probability and controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state), and high probability and second KT There are cases where the state is controlled (high probability / second KT state).

  In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball is won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state among the KT states is such that the opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is placed in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur, and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

  Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state in the case of a normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. (Except for the case of forced disengagement), the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. Thereby, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated mainly by changing the second special symbol, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the variation time of the selected variation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the KT state has a higher ratio of the number of variations to a certain time than the normal state, and the KT state is in the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41 is configured to be 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and a group of nails forming a downflow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The time from when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the time required for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state and the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state, the one gaming ball remains as it is. The variable winning ball device 6B can be won.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
58-2 and 58-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 58-2 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. In addition, FIG. 58-3 shows the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, in the present example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. Note that the setting is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

  First, with reference to FIG. 58-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 58-2 (A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58-2 (B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability) The small hit probability is constant as “6298/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. By making the setting values different from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58-3, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 58-3 (A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58-3 (B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest hit probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

  On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 58-3 (A) and (B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability) The small hit probability is constant as “62986/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. However, in the present example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 58-3), compared with the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 58-2), the small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for the small hit determination when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value while the small hit probability is made constant, as shown in FIGS. 58-3 (A) and (B), the off probability is generated. By making the setting values different from "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each setting value may be matched.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 58). -2 and FIG. 58-3, there is no set value with which the outlier probability becomes 0). Then, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). , The outliers are different).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the deviation probability may be 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the outfall probability becomes 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outfall may not be included.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the small hit probability may be 0 (that is, the judgment value that does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 58-2), the small hit probability is uniformly 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

  Note that in FIGS. 58-2 (A) and (B) and FIGS. 58-3 (A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probability variation state (high-probability state) and the indetermination variation state (low-probability state). Although the probability of deviation is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high-probability state) is higher than that in the non-probability change state (low-probability state). It is also possible to reduce and match the outlier probabilities. Furthermore, even if the set values are different values of "1" and "2", for example, the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be set is less than six stages, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting change function, a type of gaming machine having a six-stage setting change function and a hardware / software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
58-4 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on a random number for hit type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of "6R regular big hit", "6R certainty big hit", "9R certainty big hit", or "16R certainty big hit".

  As shown in FIG. 58-4 (A), in the second embodiment, irrespective of which of the setting values "1" to "6", the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. , With a probability of 9%, it is determined as “16R probability variation big hit”, with a probability of 56% is determined as “6R probability variation jackpot”, and with a probability of 35% is determined as “6R regular jackpot”. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-4 (B), in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a 10% chance of being determined as a "16R probability variation jackpot", a 50% probability of being determined as a "9R probability variation jackpot", a 5% probability of being determined as a "2R probability variation jackpot", and a 35% probability. "2R normal big hit" is decided.

  The "16R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled in a big hit game state of 16 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "9R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 9 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state for 6 rounds and is shifted to a high-probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

  The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state for 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

  In the second embodiment, in the case of "16R certainty variation jackpot", "9R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", and "6R regular jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example, in each round of the jackpot game) , 30 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, the special winning opening is controlled to be in an open state, and a maximum of 10 big winning openings are won in each round. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to either the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type. , How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIGS. 58-29).

(Small hit type judgment table)
58-5 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern, the small hit type is "small hit A", "small hit B" based on the random number for the small hit determination. , Or “Small hits C”.

  As shown in FIG. 58-5 (A), in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is set, , 100% of the time, it is decided as "small hit A". Further, as shown in FIG. 58-5 (B), in the second embodiment, regardless of which one of the set values "1" to "6", the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a probability of 70% and is determined to be a “small hit B” and a probability of 30% to be a “small hit C”.

  In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-10), and the small hit game. You can hardly expect to win a game ball to the special prize hole. Also, in the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig.58-11), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. Also, in the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-12), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
58-6 to FIG. 58-8 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the second embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8, nine types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of # 01 to # 34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n = 01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

  When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 58-6 (A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-6 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 06.

  When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), in FIG. 58-6 (B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-6 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 07 to # 09.

  When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 58-7 (C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 01 to # 03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern # 02 is also determined when the small hit is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern # 03 is also determined when it is determined to be a big hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

  In the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Will occur. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the variable display is executed. By reducing the frequency, the frequency of small hits is rather reduced to prevent the situation where the small hits are aimed at for winning prize balls even in the non-KT state. In the second embodiment, the “frequency of occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small hits per unit time. The rate of occurrence per hit is higher than in the normal state.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, it varies even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, such as 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at the prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, since it is not necessary to take a long time to digest the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, the variation time is shorter than that in the case of a small hit. There is.

  When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state is ended. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability / first KT shown in FIG. 58-7 (D) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 04 to # 06. Is decided.

  As shown in FIG. 58-7 (D), when it is determined that the first change of the low probability / first KT state is the deviation, the change time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second change pattern # 04 of the short change is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change pattern # 05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). In the second embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but the variable winning ball device 6B actually has a special variable by increasing the opening time. The special winning opening in the winning ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that some game balls are accumulated on the bottom members of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately transferred. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time elapses until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom surface member of the are allowed to win the special winning opening, It is prevented that a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

  Also, in the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG. 58-7 ( The low probability / first KT shown in E) and the 2nd to 49th variation second special symbol variation pattern table are selected to determine the variation pattern. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation patterns # 07 to # 13 It is decided to either. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (E), when it is determined that the low probability / the second KT state of the 2nd to 49th variation is a deviation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation with a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or a second fluctuation pattern # 08 of a shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, which is even shorter, may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low-probability / first KT state is the 2-49th variation, the second variation pattern # 09 with reach may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the small hit is the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern # 10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern # 11 of the shortened variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 07 and # 10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 08 and # 11 include one or more second reserved memories. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined as a big hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 13 with reach is determined.

  In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the 50th fluctuation display (that is, the low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If yes, the low probability / first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (F) are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 14 to # 16. Is decided.

  In the second embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when it is determined that the low probability / the 50th variation of the first KT state is the deviation or the small hit, the image display device 5 displays a character such as "end of chance time !!" The second variation pattern # 14 and the second variation pattern # 15 accompanied by the end display for performing are determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-7 (F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability / first KT state is a big hit, a character display such as “end of chance time !!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern # 16 with a predetermined revival display after the end display to be performed is determined.

  Incidentally, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58-6, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern # 07 in which the variation time is 10 seconds. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs and the player is a small hit even in the second KT state. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in the second embodiment, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, it is possible to shift to the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol before the frequent occurrence of forced deviation. Is configured.

  In addition, unlike the second embodiment, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first 1 special symbol jackpot When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if it is a game machine of the 2nd special symbol forcibly disengaged), the variation of the first special symbol jackpot in the KT state The time may be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

  When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is finished. A variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability / first KT shown in FIG. 58-8 (G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, one of the second variation patterns # 17 to # 21. Is decided.

  As in the case of the first change in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), the change time is also determined when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability / first KT state. The second variation pattern # 17 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, even when it is determined that the first variation of the high probability / first KT state is the deviation, the second variation pattern # 18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation pattern for the second starting winning opening opening preparation (second variation pattern # 19) may be determined. On the other hand, even when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 58-8 (G), when it is determined that the big variation is the first variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 21 with reach is determined.

  Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot and the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, if the variation display after the second variation is executed, FIG. 58-8 (H High probability / first KT time and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation and thereafter is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, any of the second variation patterns # 22 to # 28. Will be decided.

  Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the second variation pattern # 22 of a shortened variation with a variation time of as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern # 23 of a shortened variation with a variation time of as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit after the second variation of the high probability / first KT state, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern # 25 of the variation or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern # 26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns # 22 and # 25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns # 23 and # 26 are one or more second reserved memories stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 28 with reach is determined.

  When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability / second KT state, high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second KT shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 58-8 (I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # 29 to # 34. .

  As shown in FIG. 58-8 (I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 29 of a short variation with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds is determined. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern # 30 of normal fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern # 33 of fluctuation may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation pattern # 34 with reach is determined.

  When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on the random number for judging the fluctuation pattern, and which fluctuation pattern is to be determined. 58-9, in order to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT time shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

  As shown in FIG. 58-9, in the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the high probability / second KT state, and when the variable display that is a small hit is executed. Irrespective of which of the set values is “1” to “6”, is determined to be the second variation pattern # 32 with a probability of 70% and is determined to be the second variation pattern # 33 with a probability of 30%. . Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the 1.5 second shortening fluctuation will be selected.

  In addition, in FIG. 58-9, as an example, the variation pattern table in the case of executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability / second KT state is shown in FIGS. 58-6 to 58-8. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6".

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 58-7 to 58-9, a shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and a shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is highly likely to occur in the case of the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 58-10 to 58-12 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 58-10 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. 58-11 shows the open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit B. 58-12 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1) show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, respectively, and FIG. 58-10 (2). 58-12 (2) show open patterns of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the special variable winning ball apparatus 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

  First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1). As shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbols is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 0.2 seconds, and the winning symbol and the deviating symbol are derived and displayed. The fixed time is 0.2 seconds. And when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has passed, the second starting winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

  When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 58-10 (1). In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 58-11 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -12 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of the small hit A. , Because the special variable winning ball device 17 opens for only a very short 0.2 seconds, it is almost impossible to expect a winning). However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-10 (1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won in the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

  In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58-12 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the lapse of at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the variation time of the next ordinary symbol of 0.2 seconds, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and the second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds is there. Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

  In the second embodiment, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed. , A variation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, a symbol finalization time 0.2 seconds and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds after 0.5 seconds have passed, together with the game ball Is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B while being controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2). As shown in FIG. 58-10 (2) to FIG. 58-12 (2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbols is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is derived and displayed. The fixed time is 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has passed, the second starting winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

  When the game ball is won in the second start winning port when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 58-10 (2). In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 58-11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -12 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

  In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is as short as 0.2 seconds. Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds as the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened (normal symbol variation time 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time) A relatively long period of 0.2 seconds + time before the second start winning opening opening process 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2), the open time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. As compared with the first KT state, the game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. However, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening can hardly be expected even in the second KT state.

  In the second KT state, the game balls can easily win the special winning opening and the prize balls can be easily obtained. Therefore, in this example, it is also referred to as "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

  In this example, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed depending on whether the small hit type is small hits A to C. I can't stop. For example, the number of times the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened may be changed depending on which of the small hit types A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, while in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) ) May be provided with a small hit type in which game balls can be won to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three kinds of small hits A to C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, it is configured to provide four or more small hit types. Good.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed. , After the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball Is configured to take about 0.6 seconds from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

  In the second embodiment, the process of performing variable display of normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing the process (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Whether or not it is a big hit game state, it is determined whether or not it is a normal figure hit with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%).

  In the second embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the same. In the first KT state, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't stop. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. In addition, for example, the second start winning opening opening processing time after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). Particularly, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state. .

  In the second embodiment, as will be described later, in the first KT state, by controlling the high base state by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 58-12 (1), control is performed so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B becomes longer. Further, in the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12 (2). It is controlled to shorten the time.

  Note that, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is shown in FIGS. 58-10 (1) to 58- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 12 (1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIGS. 58-10 (2) to 58-12. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and in other states including the big hit game state, the special flag may not be set.

  Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be shortened when the low probability / last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the low probability / first KT state, the special flag may be erased in response to the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the low probability / first KT state ends. be able to.

  As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening variation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for the shortened variation may be separately managed to perform the control.

  Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be short-circuited and opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left hitting state), only a few game balls are fired. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-10 to 58-12, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture the target of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate) The variable winning ball device 6B is not opened by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, before the variable winning ball device 6B reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. Since the opening is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

  58-13 and 58-14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the second embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 58-13, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of decorative symbols. Control.

  The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is to be offset. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit. . Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. . Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

  Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In the second embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the display result designation command immediately before the first variation pattern command. Can be determined to be a display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so display Although the result designation command can be combined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit / 9R probability variation big hit / 6R probability variation big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R probability variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / out The variation pattern command may be determined corresponding to, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

  Command 9C00 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed lamp 132 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed lamp 132 has started lighting.

  Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designating command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is a production control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare design command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is a production control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

  The command B1XX (H) is a production control command (a special winning opening open display command) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX (H) is a production control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies display after the round during the big hit game (display of the interval between the rounds).

  The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning prize designation command. In the form, the first effective start prize designation command and the second effective start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

  Command C801 (H) is an effect control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

  Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

  The command E000 (H) is a production control command (low probability / non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability / first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy / first KT background designation command) that designates background display when the gaming state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy / second KT background designating command) that designates the background display when the gaming state is the high probability / second KT state.

  Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101 (H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106 (H) is transmitted as the set value command.

  When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, the production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. 58-13 and 58-14, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. In addition, production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 58-13 and 58-14 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command regarding a big hit game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

  Next, the special symbol process processing in the second embodiment will be described. In the special symbol process process of the second embodiment, in addition to the processes in the special symbol process process described above with reference to FIG. 6, a gate passage waiting process is provided. In this gate passage waiting process, control for waiting the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed, the details of which will be described later. In the second embodiment, as a description of the special symbol process processing, the first special symbol process processing regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol process processing regarding the second special symbol will be described separately. . Therefore, each process in the special symbol process process (for example, a special symbol normal process) is also described separately from the process relating to the first special symbol and the process relating to the second special symbol. In the following description, the first ... Process indicates a process regarding the first special symbol, and the second ... Process indicates a process regarding the second special symbol.

  58-15 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process in the first special symbol process process. The state in which the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing, in the state where the variable display of the first special symbol is not made in the first special symbol display device 4A. This is the case when there is no first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

  In the first special symbol normal process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step S51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

  If the number of first reserved memories is 0, the first customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S52A).

  If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102 to read out the RAM102. In the first random number buffer area (step S53A), decrement the value of the first reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. Yes (step S54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as follows: It is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always matched with the order of the first reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step S55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of step S55A. However, the setting changing process (the process of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

  The timing of transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and for example, the set value command may be configured to be transmitted each time the variable display ends, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step S56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, the low probability / non-KT state determination command is determined, and the low probability / non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability / first KT state is determined, and the low probability / first KT background designation command is set. When the certainty variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability / first KT state. If the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability / second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability / second KT state, and the high precision / second KT background designation command is determined. Send.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step S57A). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing when the second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variation display of the second special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S69A without performing the processes of step S58A and thereafter. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, it is forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

  The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is fluctuating in step S57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as the hitting random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step S59A at the time of starting winning. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

  In addition, for example, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is in step S57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a hit determination random number is set and small without performing the processing of steps S58A to S63A. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination was acquired at the time of winning the start prize.

  When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the first random number storing buffer (step S58A), and executes the big hit judging module (step S59A). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the hit judging random number matches a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step S61A). . Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step S62A), and the big hit type is stored (step S63A), and step S69A. Move to.

  If the big hit is not made in step S60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step S64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (may be a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step S66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step S67A), and stores the small hit type (step S68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be small hit A (see FIG. 58-5 (A)). Then, the process proceeds to step S69A.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times in the high base state is "0" (step S69A), and if it is "0", step S75A. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step S70A), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step S71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step S72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step S73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step S74A). Then, the process proceeds to step S75A.

  In the second embodiment, as will be described later, the high base flag is set and the number of executions of the variable display in the high base state is managed only when the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit is finished. This is the case where the probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is controlled and variable display is performed 50 times. In the case of the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, Y is determined in steps S71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps S72A and S72B. At the same time as being reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps S73A and S73B, and the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

  In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state is finished, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

  Then, in step S75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S75A.

  In addition, in step S59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, by taking into consideration the game state and using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

  58-16 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is being shortened is set. It is confirmed (step S1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 58-6). (See FIGS. 58-8)) Since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 58-6 (A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT is selected (step S1701A). If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100, as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern, KT shown in FIG. 58-6 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step S1702A).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps S1701A and S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 58-6 is to be determined is determined (step S1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Alternatively, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

  When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1704A).

  Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1703A, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step S1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step S1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step S1707A).

  58-17 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 designation command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S1120A).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step S1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S1122A), performs control to transmit the first symbol fixing designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step S1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S1127A).

  When the first variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S1124A). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S1125A). Whether or not the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y in step S1124A), or if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y in step S1125A), the CPU 103 causes the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step S1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing (step S1127A).

  By performing the processing of steps S1124A and S1125A, in the second embodiment, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special The variable display of the symbols is forcibly stopped so that the big hit and the small hit do not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly disengaged, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S1124A. As for, the control is forcibly controlled so as to stop and display the symbol.

  If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step S1124A, N in step S1125A), the process ends as it is.

  58-18 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step S2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step S2011A). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which complete | finishes lighting of the right striking lamp 132 (step S2012A), and also performs control which transmits a right striking lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU120 (step S2013A).

  In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has made a right-handed operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed lamp 132 is turned on during the low probability / first KT state, but the 50th variation display is started by executing the processing of steps S69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When the low probability / first KT state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps S2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. Sometimes the right-handed lamp 132 is turned off.

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step S2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step S2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, it indicates that the CPU 103 outputs a big hit signal 1 (a signal indicating that a big hit is being played) and a big hit signal 2 (a signal that indicates that the player is in a long game) to the outside. The big hit signal output flag is set (step S2017A). In the second embodiment, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the jackpot signal output flag being set in step S2017A, and the jackpot signal 1 is externally output to the hall computer to output the jackpot signal. If the external output of 2 is not being performed, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the special winning opening pre-opening timer (step S2018A), sets the round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step S2019A), and sets "1" to the round number counter indicating the number of big hits. Is set (step S2020A).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2021A), and also controls to transmit a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2022A).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step S2023A).

  By executing the processes of steps S2021A and S2022A, in the present example, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to be lit when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game, and the right The striking lamp 132 is turned on.

  In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The lamp 132 may be configured to start lighting.

  When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step S2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step S2024A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing (step S2029A).

  In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol is only the small hit type is the small hit A, the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right hitting lamp 132 is not turned on, and the right hitting lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

  If the first small hit flag is also not set (N in step S2024A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S2030A).

  In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, the right hitting notification that prompts the player to shoot the game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

  Further, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first start winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, since it is in a gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol is not immediately started and the first reserved memory is stored) You may comprise.

  On the contrary, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a large volume sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right-handing operation to return to the left-handing operation from the clerk of the game store.

  Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when a game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, five times) within a predetermined period (for example, one minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (for example, one) of game balls is detected, a left hit notification may be performed.

  Further, for example, while the external signal is not output in the detection of the game ball at the passage gate 41, the external signal is output in the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. May be.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the demo display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied, but when the demo display is performed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second start winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When it is detected that the game ball is won, the execution of the demo display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

  58-19 is a flowchart showing a first gate passage waiting process in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step S2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103, if set, resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag, and the high base number counter. The value of is cleared to 0 (step S2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step S2505A), and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit opening preprocessing (step S2506A).

  In the second embodiment, by executing the first gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate. The game ball passes through 41, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

  58-20 and 58-21 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end processing in the first special symbol process processing. In the first big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S2201A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step S2202A). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step S2203A), and the process ends.

  In step S2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204A). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step S2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step S63A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag indicating that it is a probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207A), and is under the control of shortening the variation display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step S2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. In the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If it is not the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit completed this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step S2209A). Whether or not the 6R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step S63A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212A), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step S2213A), Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set to shift to the KT state (step S2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of the 6R probability variation big hit, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state).

  In the case of a 6R certainty variation big hit, the high base flag is set but the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step S2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the subsequent variable display, It is determined as Y in step S2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step S2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219A), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step S2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step S2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S2223A).

  FIG. 58-22 is a flowchart showing a first small hitting end process in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step S2300A), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step S2304A. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step S2301A), and control for transmitting the small hit end designation command is performed (step S2302A). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step S2303A), and the processing is executed. finish.

  In step S2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2305A). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S2309A).

  58-23 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state where the second special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing, in the state where the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is the case when there is no second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) and a small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is open).

  In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

  If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step S52B).

  If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102, and the RAM102. In the second random number buffer area (step S53B), decrement the value of the second reserved memory number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. Yes (step S54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number = n−. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step S55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of step S55B. However, the setting changing process (the process of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

  After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step S56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designating command is the same as the processing shown in step S56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step S57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variation display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S69B without performing the processes of step S58B and thereafter. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big hit of the first special symbol, the big hit determination value is stored regardless of whether it is stored or not.

  The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is fluctuating in step S57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a hitting random number is performed, and the process proceeds to step S59B so that at the time of starting winning. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

  In addition, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step S57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a hit determination random number is set and small without performing the processing of steps S58B to S63B. By performing the hit determination, the hit may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination was acquired at the time of winning the start prize.

  When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storing buffer (step S58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step S59B). The big hit judging module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the hit judging random number matches a predetermined big hit judging value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S61B). . Then, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R sure change big hit, a 9R sure change big hit, a 2R sure change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit (step S62B), and the big hit type is stored (step S63B). ), And proceeds to step S69B.

  If the big hit is not made in step S60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step S64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (may be a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step S65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step S66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step S67B), and stores the small hit type (step S68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, it is determined that the small hit type is small hit B or small hit C (see FIG. 58-5 (B)). Then, the process proceeds to step S69B.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step S69B), and if it is "0", the process proceeds to step S75B. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the gaming control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step S70B). It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step S71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step S75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step S72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step S73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step S74B). Then, the process proceeds to step S75B.

  Then, in step S75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbols to be stopped are fixed just before step S75B.

  In addition, in step S59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit determination table or the probability change big hit determination table.

  The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 58-16. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 58-16, the second variation pattern process has been described by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step S1700A, and confirms whether the special figure time saving flag is set. If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 shows a non-variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (C) as a variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern. The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for KT time is selected. If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether or not the probability change flag and the high base flag are set, and the number of changes. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any KT time shown in FIGS. 58-7 (D) to 58-8 (I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability / first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 58-7 (D) The second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-7 (E) is selected for the 2nd to 49th variations, and the second variation shown in FIG. 58-7 (F) for the 50th variation. Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (if the probability is high / the first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 58-8 (G). The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 58-8 (H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (high probability / second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 58-8 (I) is selected.

  The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 58-17. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 58-17, if the "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation process has been described.

  Even in the second special symbol variation process, the same process as steps S1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation process is executed, and the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A. If so, the CPU 120 for effect control is controlled to transmit the second compulsory symbol determination designation command, and the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be out of force. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be consumed, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning port), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol to the right of the game area ( In a gaming machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device) and which is configured to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, a configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, because the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is high, the frequency of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also high, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

  58-24 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol stop process, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step S2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step S2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2012B), and also controls to transmit the right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2013B).

  Next, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step S2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step S2016B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step S2018B.

  If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step S2017B). In the second embodiment, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the jackpot signal output flag being set in step S2017B, and the jackpot signal 1 is externally output to the hall computer to output the jackpot signal. If the external output of 2 is not being performed, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step S2018B), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step S2019B), and sets "1" in the round number counter (step S2018B). S2020B).

  Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2021B), and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S2022B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step S2023B).

  By executing the processing of steps S2021B and S2022B, in the present example, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to be lit when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game, and the right The striking lamp 132 is turned on.

  When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step S2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small hit flag is set (step S2024B). When the 2nd small hitting flag is set, control which transmits the small hitting start designated command to CPU120 for production control is done (step S2025B).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step S2026B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2027B), and right-handed the production control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the lighting start designation command is performed (step S2028B).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step S2029B).

  By executing the processing of steps S2027B and S2028B, in the present example, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to be lit when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game, The right-handed lamp 132 is turned on.

  However, in the present example, even when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, if the KT state is in progress, the right-handed lamp 132 should already be lit. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step S2026B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed lamp 132 is started to be turned on again. The right-handed lighting start command is not transmitted.

  If the second small hit flag is also not set (N in step S2024B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step S2030B).

  58-25 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step S2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step S2502B). If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step S2504B.

  If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step S2503B). In the second embodiment, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the jackpot signal output flag being set in step S2503B, and the jackpot signal 1 is externally output to the hall computer to output the jackpot signal. If the external output of 2 is not being performed, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

  Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step S2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second big hit start designation command (step S2505B) and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit opening preprocessing (step S2506B).

  In the second embodiment, by executing the second gate passage waiting process, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, the big hit game is not started immediately, but the passage gate. The game ball passes through 41, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

  58-26 and FIG. 58-27 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step S2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S2201B), and the control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step S2202B). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step S2203B), and the process ends.

  In step S2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2204B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 103 confirms whether the type of the jackpot that ended this time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot (step S2206B). Whether or not it is the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, confirming the big hit type stored in step S63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B), and sets the special figure time saving flag and shifts to the KT state ( Step S2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. In the case of the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is controlled.

  If neither the 16R certainty variation jackpot nor the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot finished this time is the 9R certainty variation jackpot (step S2209B). Whether or not it is a 9R certainty variation jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the jackpot type stored in step S63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step S2213B). Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step S2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 9R probability variation big hit, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is controlled.

  In the case of a 9R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step S2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 9R certainty variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, In the second special symbol stop process, Y is determined in step S2010B, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step S2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  If it is not the 9R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step S2219B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step S2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the high base number counter (step S2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S2223B).

  58-28 is a flowchart showing a second small hitting end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit end display timer is set (step S2300B), and if the small hit end display timer is set, moves to step S2304B. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step S2301B), and control for transmitting the small hit end designation command is performed (step S2302B). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) is set in the small hit end display timer (step S2303B), and the process is executed. finish.

  In step S2304B, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S2304B). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step S2305B). If not, the process ends.

  If the small hit end display time has passed (Y in step S2305B), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step S2306B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 (step S2307B), and right-handed the production control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the lighting end designation command is performed (step S2308B).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step S2309B).

  Here, the transition of the game state in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition a game state in the second embodiment. First, in the second embodiment, in the low-probability / low-base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs a game ball firing operation (left hit). Therefore, in the normal state, the start winning is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability / low base state, mainly a 16R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 58-29, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered after the end of the big hit game, The high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2206A to S2208A). Also, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) until the next big hit occurs. The high probability / high base state is maintained (see steps S2209A and S2212A to S2214A). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / low base state, after the big hit game ends, the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs? The low-probability / high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219A to S2221A).

  If the player has moved to the KT state (high-probability / high-base state, low-probability / high-base state, high-probability / low-base state), in the second embodiment, the player moves to the right of the game area. Aim and launch the game ball (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, mainly the start winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, and mainly the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly a 16R sure change big hit, a 9R sure change big hit, a 2R sure change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), the high probability / low base state after the big hit game ends. (High probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps S2206B to S2208B). Also, in the case of a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), if the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs, it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being the 9R certainty variation jackpot is 50% in total (see FIG. 58-4), so once the high probability / In the high base state, the high probability / high base state loops at a rate of 50%. In addition, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state), it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

  As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low-probability / high-base state (low-probability / first KT state), a high-probability / low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, when the 2R normal big hit occurs in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B). In the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 58-4 (D) and (E)). Once the low probability / high base state is reached, the low probability / high base state will loop at a rate of 35%. In addition, after the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit occurs and the low probability / high base state is reached, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, it is shown in FIG. As shown, a low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps S2010A to S2014A).

  As shown in FIG. 58-29, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in the high-probability / low-base state (high-probability / second KT state), the high-probability / low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability / second KT state) is entered, and the high probability / low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps S2206B to S2208B). In the second embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is Since it is 15% (see FIGS. 58-4 (D) and (E)), once the high probability / low base state is reached, the high probability / low base state is looped at a rate of 15%. In addition, when 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps S2209B, S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state), it shifts to the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability / high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps S2219B to S2221B).

  In FIG. 58-29, the low probability / low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, when the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) is entered. In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs, it shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 58-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 58-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  Further, in FIG. 58-29, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / low base state (high probability / second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability / high base state (high probability / first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability / high base state (low probability / first KT state), and the low probability / high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

  Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. 58-30 is a flow chart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step S5111), The control for transmitting the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step S5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes gate switch passage processing (step S5113).

  In the second embodiment, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps S5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in the second embodiment, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operating area, but it is in a gate passage waiting state after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and before the big hit game is started. The gate passage designation command is transmitted regardless of whether or not it is.

  Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

  Incidentally, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether or not it is in the gate passage waiting state, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in step S5111, the gate switch passage process of step S5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the gate passage waiting state, the normal symbol even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The variable display may be configured not to be executed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the passage gate 41 is normally used as a combined use gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see step S25 of FIG. 5) is performed in the timer interrupt process. Since it is executed before the normal symbol process process (see step S26 in FIG. 5), the game of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting region is performed after performing the process of detecting the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operating region. The process of detecting the passage of a sphere is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

  Gate switch passage processing (step S5113): The CPU 103 causes the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to have a maximum count value (gate passage memory number) (in this example, " 4 ”) has been reached. If the maximum value has not been reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. In addition, the LED of the universal figure reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number per ordinary symbol for determination, and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing memories.

  Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): CPU103 is a state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S5100, specifically, the normal symbol) If the variable display of the normal symbol is not displayed on the display device 20, and the variable winning ball device 6B is not opened / closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passage memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be the hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101).

  Normal symbol variation process (step S5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "2") indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102).

  Normal symbol stop process (step S5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a deviating symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the normal electric accessory release preprocessing (step S5103).

  Ordinary electric accessory release pre-processing (step S5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric auditors product operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "4") indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step S5104).

  Normal electric auditors product operation process (step S5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100).

  58-31 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal process (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step S5121). If the gate passage memory number is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends. If the gate passage memory number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 103 reads the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passage memory number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage memory number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step S5123). That is, the random number per ordinary symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory = n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number is always the order of gate passing memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to match.

  Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to be a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (normal symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to be a normal symbol. It is determined (step S5127). Note that in the second embodiment, in step S5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets 99/100 regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. With the probability of, it is decided to be a normal symbol.

  In step S5127, when the read random number for normal symbol determination is within the range of the hit (in the case of hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as the display result (step S5128), and proceeds to step S5130. In step S5127, if the read random number for normal symbol hit determination is not within the hit range (if it is out), the CPU 103 sets the out symbol as the display result (step S5129), and proceeds to step S5130.

  In step S5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as a normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in step S5130, S5131). Moreover, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N in step S5130, S5132).

  Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5133).

  FIG. 58-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hit in step S5127). It is confirmed (whether or not it is determined) (step S3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, for example, by setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step S5127, it can be confirmed by checking whether or not the flag is set. You can

  When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not a hit symbol, but a deviating symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value indicating the normal symbol normal process (step S5100) ( Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step S3708).

  In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step S3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step S3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set to the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step S3705). .

  Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step S5103) (step S3707).

  FIG. 58-33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step S5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends as it is.

  When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the time before opening the normal electric auditors product (Y in step S3802), the CPU 103 determines whether the high base flag is set (step S3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S3805). If the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step S3804).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the normal electric accessory release time of 5.5 seconds is set in the first KT state, and the normal electric accessory release time of 0.2 seconds is set in the normal state or the second KT state. By setting, the first KT state is in a state in which it is easier to make a start winning in the second starting winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than the normal state or the second KT state.

  It should be noted that the control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the second embodiment. For example, in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened a large number of times as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B). 6B may be set as the number of times of opening 6B, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set as 2). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 6B is opened, it is possible to easily make a start winning in the second starting winning opening.

  Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B. May be executed in combination with a control for increasing the number of times of release of.

  Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step S3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step S5104) (step S3807).

(Setting suggestion production)
In the second embodiment, the effect control board 12 (sub side) specifies the set value based on the set value command (effect control command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side), and suggests the set value. Determine the presence and type of setting suggestive effect.

  FIG. 58-34 is a diagram showing an example of a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the setting suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 58-34, in the setting value suggesting effect determination table, there is no setting value suggesting effect, setting value suggesting effect A, setting value suggesting effect B, setting value suggesting effect C, setting value suggesting effect D, and setting value. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F.

  The set value suggestive effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggestive effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", The highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", The highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the orange display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", The highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", The highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. When it is “6”, the execution rate is highest.

  Next, an effect mode of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 58-35 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a set value suggestive production. In this example, the set value suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 58-35 (A), when the image display device 5 is performing variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design, when the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect comes, FIG. 58-35 (B1) ) To (B3), the set value suggesting effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-35 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggesting effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined character images CH1, CH2, CH3 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestive effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-35 (B1), the predetermined character image CH1 is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 so as to be set. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggesting effect C is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-35 (B2), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image CH2 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed. In addition, for example, when the set value suggestive effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-35 (B3), the set value is set according to a mode in which the predetermined character image CH3 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 58-35, the case where the set value suggestive effect A, the set value suggestive effect C, and the set value suggestive effect E are executed is shown. However, for example, when the set value suggestive effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

  In this example, which set value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of order and the set value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

(Small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production)
In the second embodiment, the effect control board 12 (sub side) is in the second KT state based on the effect control command (for example, the high-accuracy / second KT background designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side). It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is the second KT state, the presence and type of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect that suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue is determined.

  FIG. 58-36 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 58-36, in the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table, it is determined for small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a red display color on the image display device 5.

  As shown in FIG. 58-36, in this example, the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is highest when the setting value is "1" and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is "2". The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestive production is next higher when the execution ratio is next higher and the setting value is “3”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is set when the setting value is “4”. Is the next highest, and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest. It's getting low.

  As shown in FIG. 58-36, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect A is highest, and when the setting value is "6", the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect B is shown. Has the highest execution rate.

  In the present example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". However, when the setting value is "2", the jackpot is not generated. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value “1” is the setting state in which the second KT state is the most likely to continue (high degree of continuation expectation), and the setting value “6”. In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

  Note that, as described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without the occurrence of a big hit.

  Further, in the present example, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is highest when the setting value is "1", so that the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further increase the expectation that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue.

  Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 58-37 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

  In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (A), for example, the character display Im4 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being executed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 58-37 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined effect images Im5 and Im6 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images Im5 and Im6 is shown. In this case, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (B1), a predetermined effect image Im5 is displayed in the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 58-37 (B2), a predetermined effect image Im5 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

  In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is performed by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect or while the effect image of any display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

(Right-handed notification)
Next, the right-hand strike notification in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58-38, a right-handing notification LED 37 for promoting a right-handing operation is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, for example. The right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control board 12 (sub-side) based on the effect control command (right-handing lighting end start command, right-handing lighting end designation command) transmitted from the main board 11 (main side). Lighting is controlled.

  In this example, regardless of whether it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and it is a big hit, when the big hit game is in progress As shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) turns on the right-handed lamp 132 (see steps S2021A and S2021B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 58-38 (1) (steps S2022A, S2022B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), the right-handed display Im7 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 by the effect control CPU 120 (see step S624).

  Further, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed lamp 132 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step S2027B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (2), the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the effect control CPU 120 (see steps S2028B and S634). . However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (2), the right-handed display Im7 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

  On the other hand, in the present example, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 58-38 (3), during the small hit game, the right hit lamp 132 is lit and right hit The notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right-handed display Im7 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

(Effects and the like of the second embodiment)
As described above, according to the second embodiment, the first identification information (based on the entry of the game medium (eg, game ball) into the first starting area (eg, the first starting winning opening)) For example, the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on the game medium having entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). ) Variable display is possible. Also, variable means (for example, special variable winning) capable of changing between a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible A ball device 17). Further, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) and a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state ( For example, a small hit game state) can be controlled, and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves on a predetermined path (for example, an area on the left side of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is a moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific path (for example, a region on the right side of the game region) is provided so that it can enter. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 58-38 (1) and (2)) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific path, and the variable display of the first identification information. When the special state is controlled after the execution of (1), the specific notification is not executed (for example, see FIG. 58-38 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

  Specifically, as shown in the second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type on the first special symbol side Is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the second When the variable display of the special symbol is configured to be forcedly stopped to stop, if the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the side of the first special symbol with a low winning rate (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable because the player wastes the game ball in spite of being unlikely to expect to win the special winning opening, and rather gives a disadvantageous launch promotion notification. Therefore, in this example, while the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hitting notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, the first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable second identification information. A second hold storage unit (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on display as a hold storage is provided. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, it enters an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, It can be controlled to a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a missing pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, a predetermined value can be added when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening). It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). Further, as the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 58-38) and visibility more than the first specific notification The second specific notification (for example, the right-handed display Im7 shown in (1) of FIG. 58-38) can be executed. Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 58-38 (1)), and the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and then the special state is controlled. If so, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 58-38 (2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

  According to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, when the variable state of the first identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, it is more advantageous than when the variable state of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled. It controls to a special type of low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the specific notification is performed (see FIGS. 58-38 (2) and (3)). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when controlled to a special state and when not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed to result in a small hit). , Forcibly display the non-reach outliers). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, a delay unit (for example, a restricting piece provided on the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable unit on the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the countermeasures against the game machine.

  The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander to the left and right is provided. You may.

  In addition, according to the second embodiment, a game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and an effect based on the information from the game control means. And a production control means (for example, production control CPU 120). In addition, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed ramp 132) that performs a predetermined notification. Further, the effect control means performs a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

  In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is a variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, while the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game, in the variable display of the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, when the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute the left hitting notification during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which the control target is set. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

  Further, in this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, the case where the right hitting notification is executed even during the KT state has been described. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to a gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

  Further, in this example, the right-handing notification is executed by displaying the right-handing display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to turning on the right-handing lamp 132 and the right-handling notification LED 37 only during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit lamp 132 and the right hit notification LED 37, The right-handed notification may be performed by displaying the right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, by displaying the right-handed display Im7 on the display screen of the image display device 5 in addition to the lighting of the right-handed lamp 132 and the right-handing notification LED 37. It may be configured to execute right-handed notification.

  Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display Im7 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 58-38 (1), a symbol display (for example, a right-facing triangle display) indicating right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, the right-handed notification may be executed.

  Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball device is provided, the special variable winning ball device to be opened (special winning opening) is configured to be different depending on the type of small hit, and the small display is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different between the case where the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode in which the winning rate is low) opened by the special variable winning ball device with the small number of prize balls. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a large number of prize balls opens. You may comprise.

  Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-38 (2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 58-38 (3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the left hit operation is performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. It is possible. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 58-2 and 58). -3). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the set value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the set value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the number of special determination values is set to be common regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is set to be common), so that the difference in the advantage degree becomes excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents the gambling property from becoming excessively high.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol). It can be executed in parallel with the display). Further, it is possible to control the display result of the variable display of the second identification information to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) is increased. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  According to the second embodiment, as the special state, the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. Controllable. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute the special suggestion effect corresponding to the degree of advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 58-37). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the advantage of the special state.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, as a display result of the variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) is obtained. When the derived variable display is executed, it is possible to execute a set value suggesting effect that suggests a set value (for example, a set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 58-35). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

  In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect are executed in the variable display that is out of sync is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various modes are possible.

  According to the second embodiment, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). Further, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-5). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the small hit type is shared in common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is excessive depending on the set value. It prevents the player from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 58-5, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the determination ratio of the small hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R certainty big hit, 9R certainty big hit, 6R certainty big hit, 6R regular big hit, 2R certainty big hit, 2R certain big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined by using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. Further, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-4). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is commonly assigned), so that the difference in the advantageous degree becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

  In the present example, as shown in FIG. 58-4, regardless of which of the setting values is “1” to “6”, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the big hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

  In addition, according to the second embodiment, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-9). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  Specifically, in the second embodiment, the number of variable display mode determination values is set to be common regardless of the set value (the distribution of the variation pattern is set to be common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents the player from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

  In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the set value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for elements other than the big hit lottery Although the degree (difference in payout performance) greatly differs, which is not preferable, in the second embodiment, such a problem does not occur by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value. I have to.

  Incidentally, in this example, as shown in FIG. 58-9, the case where the allocation of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on whether the setting value is “1” to “6” and providing a difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is changed by the setting value. It may be configured such that the degree of advantage differs depending on the value.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. It is possible. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. The special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display, and the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display are decided. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation) are included. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

  According to the second embodiment, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Can be executed in parallel with the variable display). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, when the variable display is performed in a special state and the predetermined display result (for example, the outlying pattern) is derived and displayed, the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value (for example, the setting shown in FIGS. 58-35). Value suggestion production) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

  According to the second embodiment, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for a small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-3), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information have different numbers of special determination values (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing the appropriate game playability.

(Example A of production of pachinko game machines)
Next, Examples 1 to 4 will be described as production Example A executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the setting function capable of setting the set value described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. explain. In the performance example A (Examples 1 to 4), the setting suggestion that indicates the set value is executed with priority.

(Example 1)
First, the effect control process processing executed to realize the setting suggestion effect in Example 1 of effect example A will be described.

  FIG. 59-1 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S271). If the first variation start command reception flag is set (step S271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-" of the first special figure reserved storage in the start winning award reception command buffer (not shown) Various command data and various flags stored in association with "4" are shifted upward by one buffer number (step S272). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so they are erased.

  Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-1” of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be associated with buffer number “1-0” and stored. Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-2” of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-1”. 1 special figure shifts so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-3” of reserved storage are stored in association with the buffer number “1-2”, and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-4” of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number “1-3” and stored.

  If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in step S271 (step S271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (step S273; N), the variable display start setting processing is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (step S273; Y). , Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the second special figure reservation storage in the start prize winning command buffer (not shown) It shifts up one by one (step S274). The contents of the buffer number “2-0” cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift, so that the contents are erased.

  Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-1” of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be associated with buffer number “2-0” and stored. Then, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-2” of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-1”. 2 Various special command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-3” of the special storage are stored so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-2”. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-4” of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number “2-3” and stored.

  After the execution of step S272 or step S274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step S275).

  Next, the display result of the decorative design (stop design) is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step S276). In this case, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the stop design of the decorative design according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop design of the decorative design in the decorative design display result storage area. To do.

  In the first embodiment, when the received variable display result designating command is the second variable display result designating command corresponding to the non-probable variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, has three even symbols as a stop design. Decide the combination of decorative patterns (big hit pattern) that are aligned in the design. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, as a stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, A combination of decorative patterns such as “333”, “555”, and “999”). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are arranged as a stop symbol is “7” decide. In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit C, as a stop symbol, "334" and "778" are the same chances as the small hit. Determine from inside. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, as a stop symbol, "334" and "778" which are the same chances as the probability variation big hit C Determine from inside. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the outlier, it is a decorative design in which the three designs are non-uniform as the stop design, and the combination other than the above-mentioned chance Determine (outside pattern).

  In the determination of these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop design of the decorative design may be determined. That is, the stop design may be determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative designs corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 carries out the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (step S277).

(Direction during variable display)
The effect during variable display is, as an effect result, an advantageous state suggestion result that is an indication that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a setting suggestion result that is an indication that the CPU 103 sets the setting value in the setting value changing process. It is an effect (predetermined effect) that can be any of the above. In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach announcement (notice effect) that suggests that the variable display mode may reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result. . Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values is 1 to 6 can be executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during which the effect result can be either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach announcement in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the set suggestion result.

  As shown in FIG. 59-3, the effect during variable display has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect during variable display. When the execution is decided, which one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. Whether to execute the variable display effect based on is determined by a lottery.

  As shown in FIGS. 59-5 (A) to (C), the variable display effect is started at a timing (a timing before the variable display mode becomes reach) when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols was started. Then, a plurality of (e.g., eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area. The fade-out to the right side of the display area ends the variable display effect. In addition, an image Z2 may be displayed which indicates that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and fall while the plurality of images Z1 are moving to the right. Depending on the number of the paragliders that have fallen, a set value may be displayed. Or reach is suggested.

  Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body breaks and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies break and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies break and fall. In the case of the pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and dropped, in the case of the pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and dropped, and in the case of the pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and dropped. In the case of the pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are broken and dropped, and in the case of the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, 8 bodies are broken and dropped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59-5 (B) and FIG. 59-6 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timings at which the paraglider is destroyed are all the same, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-1 to PT-1 to PT-8 are the same. Paragliders of the number corresponding to PT-8 are destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number of paragliders may be destroyed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59-6 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paraglider is destroyed is the pattern PT-. Different from 8. Specifically, the seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as the pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. .

  Based on which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the effect period of the effect during variable display is executed, that is, the reach announcement or effect result in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result is the suggestion result. Regardless of which setting suggests that it becomes, a common mode effect (for example, an effect in which image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Of the common effect period in which the effect is executed, and whether the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result can be specified in a non-common mode (for example, the number of images Z2 according to the effect pattern is the image display device). 5, a non-common effect period in which an effect of moving downward in the display area 5) is executed.

  In the background in which the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effects during the variable display, the decorative design is variably displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative design is displayed smaller than usual. The small symbols may be variably displayed at predetermined locations. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect different from the variable display effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59-3, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. The patterns PT-8 and PT-9 are set as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to a setting suggestion that suggests which one of to 6 is to be set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is 8. It is a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to a reach notice that suggests the possibility of reaching. In other words, the variable display mid-stage production has the same production mode in the common production period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the production mode in the non-common production period (the number of paragliders destroyed), and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 are destroyed, it will be a reach announcement.

  Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (E.g., 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting closer to the odd number (e.g., 3 or 5), and the pattern PT- 6 indicates that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (for example, 6). .

  Then, for the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, if the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 is determined at a high rate, and thus any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is set as a first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with a low degree of expectation that the pattern is PT-5 to PT-6, and the set value is either 5 or 6. In this case, the second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} having a high degree of expectation that the setting values are 5 and 6 is determined by a high rate.

  In the first embodiment, the setting values 1 to 4 will be described as low settings, and the setting values 5 and 6 will be described as high settings. However, the setting values 1 to 3 may be low settings and the setting values 4 to 6 may be high settings. The setting values 1 and 2 may be set low, the setting values 3 and 4 may be set intermediate, and the setting values 5 and 6 may be set high to set the execution ratio of the effect pattern.

  On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbols may reach or exceed the reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 indicates that the variable display of the symbols may become super reach. Suggest.

  Regarding the pattern PT-8, the high possibility is set in the case where the variable display mode of the symbols is the normal reach, and thus the first special pattern (reach notice (low), first Regarding the pattern PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbols is super reach, and thus the second special pattern {reach Notice (high), second special mode}.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (e.g., patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot gaming state is controlled, and a specific mode (e.g., pattern PT-) that suggests settings. 1 to PT-7), it is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of kinds of effect modes, and a reach announcement (predetermined effect of a special mode) based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9. When any of the setting suggestions based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (predetermined effect in a specific mode) can be executed, the reach warning can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

  In the first embodiment, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 are determined when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of proportion than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 is super reach, that is, the big hit expectation pattern is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the super-reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is a big hit, so the pattern PT-9 is , Becomes a super-reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern PT-8.

  Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, an example in which the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested depending on the number of destroyed paragliders has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this, and a large number of paragliders (e.g., 8 bodies) or more may appear without destruction of the paraglider to suggest that the big hit or high setting is performed. Further, as long as it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which set value is set, the production mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of appearances of the character, the type of the appearing character, etc. It may be a big hit or a set value that can be suggested.

  Further, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9, the last paraglider of the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. When falling, it may be possible to output a specific sound or emit a game effect lamp 9 or the like to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

  As shown in FIG. 59-2, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step S291). The variable display result is a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (delay, non-probability variation big hit A, probability variation big hit B, probability variation big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. Can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area as described above.

  Then, while extracting a random number for determining the reach preview type, using the effect (reach advance) type determination table A shown in FIG. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach announcement in the case of performing (step S292).

  In the production (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 59-4 (A), when the variation pattern is super reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and the pattern PT-8 has 20 determination values. 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the variation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is elected at a higher rate than when the variation pattern is other than super reach.

  When the variation pattern is normal reach, 20 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-8, and 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the variation pattern is the normal reach, the winning rate of PT-8 is higher than that when the variation pattern is other than the normal reach.

  When the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and no determination value is assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach or small hit variation pattern, the reach announcement is not won.

  By setting the determination value in this way, when the variation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than in the case of other than the normal reach variation pattern, and when the variation pattern is super reach, It is easier to win the pattern PT-9 at a higher rate than in the cases other than the super reach variation pattern.

  Therefore, when the effect based on the pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be the normal reach fluctuation pattern than on the super reach fluctuation pattern, and when the effect based on the pattern PT-9 appears, it is more likely than the normal reach fluctuation pattern. It is likely to be a reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, the pattern PT-8 is determined to be the reach variation pattern, but is likely to be the normal reach. Therefore, it is a reach announcement (low) with a low jackpot expectation degree, and the pattern PT-9 is the super reach variation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will become a big hit, it is a pattern of reach announcement (high) with high expectation for big hits.

  Returning to FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is won as a result of lottery of whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type in step S292. The determination is made (step S293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is determined prior to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (step S294). , And proceeds to step S304.

  When it is determined in step S292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, when the reach announcement is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach announcement is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low )} Is selected, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is read out and the current setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S295). Next, while extracting the setting suggestion type determination random number, using the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the setting value identified in step S295, whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect , And a lottery for determining the type of setting suggestion for execution (step S296).

  In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 59-4 (B), when the setting value is 1, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. , The pattern PT-2 is assigned 10 determination values, the pattern PT-3 is assigned 25 determination values, the pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 determination values, Four determination values are assigned to PT-5, one determination value is assigned to the pattern PT-6, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the setting value is 2, 30 determination values are assigned to the non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, 25 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Five determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 25 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, one determination value is assigned to the pattern PT-5, and four determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. The judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the setting value is 3, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. The pattern PT-3 is assigned 20 determination values, the pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 determination values, the pattern PT-5 is assigned 15 determination values, and the pattern PT-6 is assigned 5 determination values. The judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, The pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 determination values, the pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 determination values, the pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 determination values, and the pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 determination values. The judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the setting value is 5, 30 determination values are assigned to non-execution, 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, Five determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 25 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 15 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. The judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the setting value is 6, 30 determination values are assigned to the non-execution, 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. The pattern PT-3 is assigned with 10 determination values, the pattern PT-4 is assigned with 5 determination values, the pattern PT-5 is assigned with 10 determination values, and the pattern PT-6 is assigned with 25 determination values. A judgment value is assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

  Since the determination value is set in this way, when the set value is 1 or 3 which is an odd number, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher ratio than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. If the set value is 2 or 4 that is an even number, it is easier to win the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easy to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the setting value is 6, it is determined that the setting value is 6 when the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

  Therefore, when the effect based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is four or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. When the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in which the number to be displayed is 5 or more is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is either 5 or 6. That is, the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are set suggestion (low) that is unlikely to be high setting (setting value 5 or 6), and the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are high setting (setting value 5 or 6). The setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

  In the first embodiment, the reach announcement type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number may be appropriately determined. Good. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated at each timer interrupt in the random number updating process.

  Returning to FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 performs one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} as a result of lottery of whether or not setting suggestion is executed and the type in step S296. It is determined whether or not is won (step S297). If it is determined that any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, if the non-execution of the reach announcement is won in step S293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. Execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on is uniquely determined, and when the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in step S293, the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are selected. Execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on either of them is determined prior to the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298), and the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S297, any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is not won, that is, the setting suggestion is not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won. Indicates whether or not the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in step S293 based on the fact that the setting suggestion is not executed or one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won in step S297. It is determined (step S300).

  When it is determined in step S300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won, when the setting suggestion non-execution is won in step S297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is obtained. Is uniquely determined, and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in step S297, the reach announcement based on the winning pattern PT-8 ( Execution of (low) is determined prior to the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (step S301), and the process proceeds to step S304.

  When it is determined in step S300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won. Is determined (step S302), and if any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, it is determined to execute the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, and the process proceeds to step S304. move on. Further, if none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, if both the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are unexecuted, the variable display is being performed without being decided to execute the effect. The effect determination process ends.

  In step S304, the effect type (one of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of step S294, step S298, step S301, and step S303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step S304). A variable display effect production execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display effect is determined is set (step S305), and the variable display effect determination process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 59-1, after the variable display during production determination process of step S277, the effect control CPU 120 in step S278 determines whether the variable display during production execution determination flag is set, that is, the variable display in step S277. In the medium effect determination process, it is determined whether execution of the variable display intermediate effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined.

  When the variable display effect production execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to step S279, the variable display effect start waiting timer is set to a period until the variable display effect is started (step S279), and the variable display effect is being displayed. The effect execution determination flag is cleared (step S280), and the process proceeds to step S281. On the other hand, when the variable execution effect determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S281 without passing through step S279 and step S280.

  As the period until the start of the variable display effect, in the first embodiment, the timing at which the paraglider appears is the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started to be specified based on, the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set to the variable display effect start waiting timer has been exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (not shown) indicating a sign is performed before the timing when the variable display effect is started, and the timing of starting the sign is changed to the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start waiting timer.

  In step S281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S282).

  In the process table, display control execution data for controlling display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling lighting of each LED, and control of sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound control execution data, the operation section control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in time series in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect device (image display as effect parts) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step S283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern designation command in a one-to-one manner. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step S284). In addition, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step S285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left-middle-right decorative design to the VRAM every time the predetermined time has elapsed, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step S286).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120, when executing the variable display of the symbols based on the reach variation pattern, starts the variable display and then performs the predetermined display before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. It is possible to execute either reach announcement or setting suggestion as an effect during variable display at the effect timing, and reach announcement in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result when determining whether or not to execute the effect during variable display. It is possible to execute (special mode effect) prior to setting suggestion (specific mode effect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

  Specifically, as shown in the variable display effect determination process of FIG. 59-2, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach announcement is executed and the type of lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type of lottery. Priority is given to it.

  That is, in the reach announcement lottery, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% when the variation pattern is super reach (step S294). The reach warning (high) will be executed (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is at a rate of 60%. Therefore, even if a lottery for setting suggestion is executed in step S296 based on the winning of the reach announcement (low), the setting suggestion based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is made in step S297. If (High) does not win, the execution of the reach warning (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined in step S301, so the reach warning is executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Will be done.

  In addition, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) indicating that the proportion of the jackpot controlled is higher than that of the reach notice (low). If both the reach warning (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach warning (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is changed to the pattern PT−. It is executed in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (step S294). On the other hand, when both the reach warning (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the priority over the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest due to the variable display effect from being deteriorated due to the excessively prioritizing the reach announcement and limiting the execution of the setting suggestion.

  Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). If both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach announcement based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are executable, patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are selected. The setting suggestion (high) based on the priority is executed prior to the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (step S298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach announcement based on any of the patterns PT-8 to PT-9 can be executed, the pattern PT-8 is selected. The reach notification (low) based on the priority can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (step S301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the variable display effect from being lowered by excessively giving priority to the setting suggestion and limiting the execution of the reach announcement.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach announcement with priority over the setting suggestion. More specifically, the reach warning (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting announcement (high) is executed with priority over the reach announcement (low), and the reach announcement (low) is suggested ( Low priority). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of “reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)”.

  In the first embodiment, the execution rate of the reach announcement may be set to be higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect that is executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least This is to indicate which set value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the game arcade that the setting suggestion frequently appears so that the player can easily guess what the set value is. Therefore, in the case of executing the variable display effect in the super reach variation pattern and when the set value is high, it is preferable for the player to suggest either, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. While it is possible, the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display. Therefore, it is preferable for the player that the reach announcement appears at a higher rate than the set suggestion.

  In addition, the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the symbol based on the super reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the non-reach variation pattern, so the variable display mode is reach. If so, the player's expectation for a big hit is higher than if the reach is not reached. Therefore, particularly in the case of a jackpot reach variation pattern, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement, the player's expectation for the jackpot is reduced and the performance becomes unsuitable. It is possible to prevent the presentation from being inappropriate by giving priority to the advance notice over the setting suggestion.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as the tendency of the effect during the variable display, if the reach announcement is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, for example, a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern and high In some situations, such as in the case of setting, the execution ratio may be set such that the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach announcement.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the reach announcement lottery and the setting suggestion lottery are separately executed, and the reach announcement lottery is executed prior to (prior to) the setting suggestion lottery. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach announcement is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the setting suggestion lottery may be performed before the reach announcement lottery. , The order is arbitrary. Further, if the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is set so that the execution ratio of the reach notice is higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion, the numbers in FIG. It is not limited to what is described.

  In the first embodiment, as the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display, the mode in which the setting suggestion that suggests the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed is exemplified. Is not limited to this, and the setting suggestion may indicate whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was activated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed are, for example, suggestions regarding the display result of one variable display. Various timings may be used as long as the timing is possible and the timing at which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suggested. For details, if you give a hint about the display result of the variable display in the reach notice, you can execute the reach notice at any time during the execution period of the variable display. If a suggestion is made regarding the display result of, the reach warning can be executed at an arbitrary timing in the period over a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the pending storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. . Further, the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, so the setting suggestion can be executed at an arbitrary timing during one business period.

  Further, if both the reach notice (predetermined effect of special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of specific mode) can be executed, the reach warning can be executed with priority over the set suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of setting suggestion, and execution of the reach announcement based on pattern PT-8 or PT-9 precedes execution of the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. And executing the reach warning based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Executing the reach announcement at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes executing the reach announcement at a rate of 100% and not executing the setting suggestion, that is, the case where the reach announcement execution rate is 100%.

  In the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested depending on the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, a variable display effect that is executed when both reach advance notice and setting suggestion can be executed. As an example, the form in which the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach announcement and the setting suggestion can be executed. As the effect during variable display, the effect result may include both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result.

  That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has the common common effect period for the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, but the reach announcement and the setting suggestion have different effect modes (in the common effect period. It may be a separate effect (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach announcement is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach announcement and the setting suggestion having different effect modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach announcement may be executed prior to the setting suggestion.

(Modification 1 of Example 1)
Next, a first modification of the first embodiment of the effect embodiment A will be described with reference to FIG. 59-7. FIG. 59-7 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect determination process as the first modification in FIG. 59-7, and FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type are given priority over the lottery of the presence / absence of the setting suggestion and the type of lottery, so that the reach notice is executed with priority over the suggestion of the setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach announcement and the setting suggestion lottery may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-7 (A), in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step S311). Next, a random number for effect type determination is extracted, and whether or not execution of variable effect during display (reach alert / setting suggestion) is performed using the effect determination (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown). A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach announcement or setting suggestion for execution (step S312).

  The production (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is not particularly shown, but the determination rate of the production patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination rates of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 are different depending on the type of the variation pattern and the setting values 1 to 6, the reach announcement and the setting suggestion execution rate shown in FIG. 59-7 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, overall, the advance notice is decided at a higher rate (priority) than the set suggestion, that is, the reach advance notice, the set suggestion, and the non-execution are set in the descending order. It is preferable that the advance notice is 50%, the setting suggestion is 40%, and the non-execution is 10%.

  Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the ratio of reach warning (high) is higher than that of reach warning (low) (for example, reach warning (high) is 40% and reach warning (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine by. When the set values are the high set values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 produces effects based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach advance notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You can decide to execute it.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the first modified example, the embodiment in which the execution rate of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion is determined based on the variation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution rate of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the variation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the variation pattern is a super reach or normal reach variation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach warning should be executed at a higher rate than at the time of a big hit, prior to the setting suggestion. Is preferred.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, one of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although possible forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is, It may be possible to execute a specific effect that has a specific result that is an advantageous state suggestion result and is also a setting suggestion result.

  In addition, as the specific effect, for example, a specific image suggesting both the big hit and the maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 59-5, when the image Z1 of the paraglider is displayed, the character Is displayed, etc.), and the display mode (for example, color, size, moving speed, orbit) of the paraglider is changed from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or the effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, the special effect sound may be output in accordance with the image display of the paraglider, or the light emitting body may be caused to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

  Further, in the first embodiment and the modified example 1, when the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result, that is, one of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while changing the reach notice and the setting suggestion. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect during display.

  Specifically, for example, a reach announcement (for example, a character announcement in which a character appears) different from the reach announcement shown in FIG. 59-5 can be executed at an effect timing different from the variable display effect. On the other hand, a setting suggestion (for example, an ending image of a big hit) different from the setting suggestion shown in FIG. It may be executable.

(Example 2)
In Example 1 of the effect example A, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one variable display is performed. The variable display effect may be executed multiple times.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 59-8 (A) as Example 2, the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach is targeted for the change patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. The variable display effect can be executed during the second period after the first period.

  In addition, since the variable display time is short for executing the variable display effect more than once for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect execution target is the variation pattern of normal reach and super reach. However, it is also possible to include a variation pattern of non-reach or small hit as an execution target of the effect during variable display.

  Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect production determination process, whether or not the variable display image production effect is executed is determined according to the variation pattern by using the variable display effect production execution determination table shown in FIG. 59-8 (B). Determine at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-8 (B), when the variation pattern is the normal reach, in the variable display during production execution determination table, 40 out of 100 random numbers for production during execution of variable display are determined. Are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. In addition, when the variation pattern is super reach, in the variable display effect production execution determination table, 60 of the 100 random numbers for variable display effect production execution determination are assigned to execute variable display effect 40 The individual is assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

  When execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 59-8 (A).

  When the execution of the variable display effect is decided when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, as shown in FIG. 59-9 (A) and FIG. 59-9 (B), it is executed in the first period. The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach announcement are determined at different ratios for the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion and the reach announcement is set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-10, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the variation pattern is the normal reach, the effect display type (effect) of the variable display effect executed in the first period is determined. The pattern) is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , PT-9 or PT-9 (expected degree (low) or expected degree (high)) at a rate of 40%. Also, as shown in FIG. 59-11, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is a pattern of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) is determined, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected degree (low) or expected degree) at a rate of 60%. (High)).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 and 59-11, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is the normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and the pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at 5% Notice (high)} is decided. Moreover, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4, {setting suggestion (low)}, and 1.2% of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of the patterns. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, At a rate of 2.2%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 any of {setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 1.5% any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, any one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any of {setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 2% any one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} and at a rate of 35% pattern PT-8. {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Moreover, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to 56.5% in the patterns PT-1 to PT. -4 is determined {setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 3.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 55%, a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. {Setting suggestion (low)}, and 5% of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 35% of the pattern PT-8. {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 5% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-12 and 59-13, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and the pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 {set suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 15%, pattern PT-9 {reach notice at a rate of 25% (High)}. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 55% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.8%. -4, {setting suggestion (low)}, 1.2% of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 15% of the patterns. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%, At a rate of 2.2%, any one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT at a rate of 58.5%. -4 any of {setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 1.5% any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%, At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. Any of {setting suggestion (low)}, and at a rate of 2% any one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} and at a rate of 15% pattern PT-8. {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and 3%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 55% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to 56.5% in the patterns PT-1 to PT. -4 of {setting suggestion (low)}, and 3.5% of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%, At a rate of 4.5%, one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined, and at a rate of 5%, a pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to 55% of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. {Setting suggestion (low)}, and 5% of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} and 15% of the patterns PT-8. {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6%. Of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 55% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is selected as the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the second period. The rate (60%) in which execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach as the effect type of the variable display effect performed in the first period. The warning (low) or reach warning (high)} is set to be higher than the rate (40%) at which execution is decided.

  Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, it becomes easy to execute the reach announcement which is the advantageous state suggestion result, so that it is close to the timing at which one game result, that is, the variable display result of the variable display is derived. You can increase the expectation for a big hit.

  In particular, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the first period, one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) Alternatively, the rate at which the setting suggestion (high) is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. With regard to the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is a pattern. One of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined rate.

  That is, the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher ratio in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are set to the second period. By being determined at a lower rate than the first period in the period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the set suggestion in the second period. .

  Therefore, for example, after the reach announcement (high) is executed as the variable display effect during the first period, the reach announcement (low) is executed as the variable display effect during the second period, that is, during the variable display. As the reach announcement is executed so that the expectation of the reach announcement decreases as the production is repeatedly executed (so-called fall), or the reach announcement (high) is executed in the first time, the variable display is performed. The player can predict that there is a high possibility that it will become a super-reach before the reach announcement is executed twice, thereby lowering the player's expectation that the variable display is a super-reach. It has become possible to suppress it.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, the effect during variable display performed during the second period is better than the effect during variable display performed during the first period. However, the rate at which any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set to be high. That is, since the variable display effect is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9 as the variable display effect is executed, the game for the variable display effect being executed in the pattern PT-5 to the pattern PT-8 is executed. It is possible to maintain the expectation of the person.

  In the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the variable display effect may be executed three times or more. In addition, in the case of performing the variable display effect three times or more in this way, by setting the determination ratio of the effect type so that the pattern PT-9 is easily determined every time the variable display effect is executed, The expectation of the technician may be maintained for a longer period.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, in the variable display effect during the first period and the variable display effect performed during the second period, the pattern PT- is used as the effect type. 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined at different rates, so that the variable display effect performed in the first period and the second display period are performed. It is difficult to continuously execute the setting suggestion with the variable display effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to monotony of the variable display effect during execution of the setting suggestion in these two variable display effects.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, in the variable display effect which is executed in the first period and the variable display effect which is executed in the second period, the pattern PT- is used as the effect type. 8 and PT-9 {Reach advance notice (low) or reach advance notice (high)} are different in the determined ratio, so that the variable display effect executed in the first period and the second display period are executed. Reach notice is difficult to be continuously executed with variable display performance. In other words, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to monotonous effect in the variable display during execution of the reach announcement in both of these two effects during variable display.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-10 to 59-13, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the variable display effect during the second period. The case in which the ratio of executing the reach announcement is different as the effect during variable display is illustrated as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect in the first period. In the case where the variable display effect is executed and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice may be executed at the same rate as the variable display effect. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach announcement is executed as the variable display effect, while the first period and the second period are executed. You can expect players to do the same.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-10 to FIG. 59-13, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if it is a variable display advance notice effect executed in the same period. Although the form in which the ratio of execution of reach announcement is determined as the variable display effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display notification effect executed in the same period. The rate at which the execution of the reach announcement is determined as the variable display effect may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the proportion of the reach announcement executed as the variable display effect during the first period and the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the middle presentation from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59-9 to 59-13, when attention is paid to the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the ratio of determining execution of setting suggestion (patterns PT-1 to PT-1). The proportion (decision to execute any one of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60% which is the same proportion regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the proportion (pattern to determine the reach announcement) PT-8 or pattern PT9 execution rate) is set to 40% which is the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, when paying attention to the effect during variable display that is executed in the second period, the ratio of determining execution of setting suggestion (the ratio of determining execution of any of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-7) is set to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value that is set, it is set to the same ratio of 40%, and the ratio that determines the reach announcement (the ratio that determines the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set to the pachinko gaming machine. The same ratio is set to 60% regardless of the set value.

  Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, in the variable display effect (first variable display effect) executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%. In the variable display effect (second variable display effect) executed in the second period, it is always set at 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to perform the setting suggestion in the same manner.

  Further, in the second embodiment, since the variable display effect can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing the reach notice and the setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. .

  More specifically, when it is possible to independently execute only the reach announcement in relation to the display result of one variable display, regarding setting suggestion, timings other than the variable display (for example, the ending of the jackpot gaming state and the variable display are set). Although it can be executed independently (when it is not executed), it is during the variable display execution period that the player pays the most attention when he is playing the game. Therefore, in the variable display effect during which both the reach announcement and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that is most noticed by the player, but also in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the effect during variable display a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible not only to increase the chances of executing the setting suggestion, but also as described above, the second period in the first period. If it is executed at a higher rate than this, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach announcement in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach announcement even in the variation pattern of the big hit.

  In the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the reach announcement or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, the non-execution of neither the reach announcement nor the setting suggestion may be determined.

  When it is possible to determine non-execution as described above, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the reach announcement is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach announcement is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different in the first period and the second period.

(Example 3)
In Example 2 of the effect example A, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 if the variable display effect has the same number of times. Regardless of this, the form in which the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same rate is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 59-14 (A) and FIG. 59-14 (B) as the third embodiment, two variable display effect during one variable display. In the case of enabling execution once, even in the same number of times of variable display performance, the execution of the reach announcement and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may.

  If execution of the variable display effect is determined, as shown in FIGS. 59-14 (A) and 59-14 (B), the variable display effect and the second period executed in the first period are executed. The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach announcement are determined at the same rate for the variable display effect performed in step 1.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 59-15 and 59-16, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined as pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5% decide. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} is decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 35%. Notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. The pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. Decide on -9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 40%. Notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%, and 2. The pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%, and the pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. Decide on -9 {reach notice (high)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 45% }, And pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and a rate of 3%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 45%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} is decided.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 50%. Notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. The pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 50%, and the pattern PT is determined at a rate of 5%. Decide on -9 {Reach Notice (High)}.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)}, 5% pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 55% pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) }, And pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} is decided.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59-17 and 59-18, focusing on the case where the variation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and the pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 17.5%, pattern PT at a rate of 17.5% Decide on -9 {Reach Notice (High)}. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%. % Of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 30% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT at a rate of 58.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and 1.2% of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, it is determined as one of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it is determined as the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern at a rate of 53.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5% and 22.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 22.5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , At a rate of 2.5%, it is determined as one of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it is determined as the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 40. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)}, 2% of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and 25% of the patterns PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 25%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 % Of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 45% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern at a rate of 41.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 27.5%. Further, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , PT-5 {pattern suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

  When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)}, 5% pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 30% pattern PT-8 {Reach notice (low)} is determined, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the second period is determined to be any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 % Of the patterns PT5 to PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of the patterns PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and 55% of the patterns. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, it is set in the first period. The variable display executed in the second period and the rate at which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display performed. The proportions in which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type of the medium effect are set to be the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the same setting suggestion result.

  Furthermore, the ratio of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} determined as the effect type of the variable display effect performed in the first period and the second period. Pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} are set as the same rate as the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed as a result. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach announcement is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same manner.

  On the other hand, in the case of performing the variable display effect in the first period or the second period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second The proportion of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} determined as the effect type is different from when the set value is set (for example, set value 6). Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to prevent the variable display effect from becoming monotonous.

  In addition, in the variable display mid-stage effect executed in the first period and the variable display mid-stage effect executed in the second period, a pattern is produced as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice ( High)} is increased. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a high setting value (for example, 5, 6), the setting suggestion is made more than when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4). Is difficult to be executed, it is difficult for the player recognizing the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment as well, the variable display effect that is executed in the second period is the pattern PT-9 as the effect type, rather than the variable display effect that is executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, since the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 is easily executed as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the player's expectation for the variable display effect being executed on the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made.

  In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-14, even when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, during variable display executed in the first period. The proportions in which the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined are the same in the production and the variable display production performed in the second period, and Although the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are illustrated in the same proportion, the present invention is not limited to this. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is used in the variable display effect during the first period and the variable display effect during the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} May be different proportion to be constant, it may be different proportions pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {Reach notice (Low) and reach notice (high)} is determined.

  In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the same variable display effect during the variable display effect during the first period and the variable display effect during the second period. Although the form in which the setting suggestion is executed in the ratio is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the second period. The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as the variable display effect during execution of the variable display effect. By doing so, the ratio (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed varies depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress monotonous effects during variable display.

  Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-14, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display effect during the first period (first variable display effect) and the variable display effect during the second period. In the case where the reach announcement is executed as the middle presentation (second variable display during the presentation), an example is shown in which the reach announcement is executed at the same number and at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect (first variable display effect) that the effect control CPU 120 executes in the first period or the variable display effect that is executed in the second period. When the reach announcement is executed as the (second variable display effect), if the variable display effect is the same number of times, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach announcement is given at the same ratio. Execution It may be. By doing so, in the case of the same number of times of display during variable display, the ratio (appearance status) at which the reach notice is executed does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The player can be expected to expect the reach announcement to be executed by the variable display effect which is executed in the first period and the variable display effect which is executed in the second period.

(Example 4)
In Example 2 and Example 3 of the effect example A, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period and the second period. In each of the embodiments, the form of determining which of the advance notice and the setting suggestion is to be executed is illustrated based on the variation pattern and the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern for the first period is Regardless of whether the reach announcement or the setting suggestion is executed based on the set value, the reach announcement or the setting suggestion is executed based on the variation pattern and the set value for the second period. That is, it may be determined whether the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period is to be executed based on different determination criteria.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 59-19 as a fourth embodiment, targeting the variation patterns of normal reach and super reach, the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the first reach. The variable display effect can be executed in the second period after the one period. In addition, since the variable display time is short for executing the variable display effect more than once for the non-reach or small hit variation patterns, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect execution target is the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect production process, when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period, For the second period, processing for determining the type of variable display effect is performed based on the variation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59-20.

  As shown in FIG. 59-20, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies a variation pattern (step S311). The variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area as described above. Next, it is determined whether the identified variation pattern is normal reach or super reach (step S312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 313. If it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, non-reach or small hit variation pattern. In the case of, the variable display effect is outside the target of the variable display effect, so the variable display effect determining process is ended.

  If the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach in step S312, the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is read to identify the current setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S313). Next, based on the setting value specified in step S313, whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when executing it are not shown in the variable display effect execution determination table. It is determined using (common to normal reach / super reach) (step S314).

  As shown in FIG. 59-21 (A), in step S314, the effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect effect execution determination table that is common to the variation patterns of normal reach or super reach, so that reach announcement, setting suggestion, and non-existence are displayed. Decide on one of the runs. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the execution of the reach warning (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determine by percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, the execution of the reach warning (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratios corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 are omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set values 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is The larger the value, the higher the setting suggestion execution rate and the setting suggestion (high) execution rate.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-22, focusing on the variable display effect type determination ratio in the first period, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 18%, and 40. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is determined not to be executed at a rate of 15%, and 43. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, it determines non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display that is executed in the first period at a rate of 12.5%, The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 45.5%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is non-executed at a rate of 10%. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display that is executed in the first period is non-executed at a rate of 5% and 50%. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 40% Then, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined.

  Returning to FIG. 59-20, it is determined whether the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined in step S314 (step S315), and when the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1 To PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S316), and a variable display effect production execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display effect during the first period is determined is set ( The process proceeds to step S317) and step S318. If the execution is not determined in step S315, that is, if the non-execution is determined, the process proceeds to step S318.

  Next, in step S318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern is the normal reach (step S318), and when it is determined to be the normal reach, based on the identified variation pattern and the set value, Whether or not to execute the effect during variable display in the second period and the effect type (effect pattern) for execution are determined using a variable effect during execution effect determination table (for normal reach) not shown (step S319).

  As shown in FIG. 59-21 (B), in step S319, the effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect effect execution determination table for normal reach to determine whether to reach advance notice, suggest setting, or not execute. . Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the reach warning (low) is executed at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is executed at a rate of 5%. Determine by percentage. Further, in the case of the setting value 6, the execution of the reach warning (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratios corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 are omitted here, the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set values 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( “High” is set such that the execution rate increases as the set value increases.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-23, focusing on the case of normal reach regarding the noticeable presentation type determination ratio during variable display in the second period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 33% {setting suggestion ( Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%, The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display that is executed in the first period is non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 8%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.2%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is non-executed at a rate of 5%, and 32. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 2.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is determined to be non-executed at a rate of 5%, and 32%. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 3%, the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 3%, and a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display that is executed in the first period is non-executed at a rate of 5%. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 5%, and the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is non-executed at a rate of 5%, and 29%. The pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined at a rate of 6%, the pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 6%, and the rate 55%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

  Further, when it is determined in step S318 that the variation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, the super reach, it is determined whether the variable display effect during the second period is executed based on the identified variation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) to be executed is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (step S320).

  As shown in FIG. 59-21 (C), in step S320, the effect control CPU 120 uses the variable display effect execution determination table for super reach to determine whether to reach advance notice, suggest setting, or not execute. To do. Specifically, for the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the CPU 120 for effect control determines the execution of the reach warning (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution. Do not decide. Although the execution ratios corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 are omitted here, the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set values 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( “High” is set such that the execution rate increases as the set value increases.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59-23, when attention is paid to the case of super reach regarding the noticeable presentation type determination ratio during variable display in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36% and 4%. The pattern PT5 to the pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined by the ratio, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined by the ratio of 5%, and the pattern PT-9 {is determined by the ratio of 55%. Reach notice (high)}.

  When the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern at a rate of 35.8%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT at a rate of 35.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is set to 35% in the patterns PT-1 to PT-. 4 {setting suggestion (low)}, 5% pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) }, And pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during the variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern 33.5%. PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is determined, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach is determined at a rate of 5%. Notice (low)}, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

  When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display executed in the first period is the pattern PT-1 to the pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) at a rate of 5% }, And pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 55%.

  Returning to FIG. 59-20, it is determined whether execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined in step S319 or step S320 (step S321), and when execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern) is determined. Any one of PT-1 to PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step S322), and a variable display effect production execution determination flag indicating that execution of the variable display effect during the second period is determined is set. Then (step S323), the effect during variable display is ended. When execution is not determined in step S321, that is, when non-execution is determined, the variable display effect is ended.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of a plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. It is determined whether to execute the setting suggestion based on which of the six, and when performing the variable display effect in the second period, the variation pattern is the normal reach and the super reach. The reach announcement or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate determination table. That is, since the judgment criterion for determining whether to execute the reach announcement or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to prevent the variable display effect from becoming monotonous.

  Further, since the setting suggestion execution rate in the first period is higher than the setting suggestion execution rate in the second period, the setting suggestion is likely to be executed in the first period, while the reach announcement is made in the second period. Since it is easier to execute, the setting suggestion is not easily executed in both the first period and the second period even though the normal reach or the super reach is achieved in the second period. Since the reach announcement is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach announcement in a well-balanced manner.

  Further, since the execution rate of the reach announcement in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach announcement in the first period, it is variably displayed by executing the reach announcement in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the middle presentation from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 59-22 to 59-24, paying attention to each set value, when performing the variable display during the first period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the reach announcement is decided at the same rate (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach announcement is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination is made at the same rate (60%). Therefore, in the variable display mid-stage effect executed in the first period and the variable display mid-stage effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the execution of the reach notice is performed. In the same way, the player can be paid attention.

  Further, even when the set value is a high setting (for example, the set values 5, 6 and the like), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only the reach warning is more easily executed than the set suggestion in the second period, but the super reach In this case, since the reach notice (high) is easily executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for the big hit.

  Furthermore, even if the setting suggestion is decided to be executed in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is easily executed compared to the case where the setting suggestion is decided to be executed in the first period. Even when is executed, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high setting.

  Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, Since the setting suggestion is determined to be executed at a higher rate than the reach announcement in the order of 3, 4, 5, 6 as the order becomes higher, the setting suggestion is more likely to appear at the higher setting, so that the player sets the set value. It is easier to predict.

  In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-21, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. An example is shown in which the execution of the reach announcement is determined at different ratios when the variable display effect (second variable display effect) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach control may be determined at the same rate when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. . By doing so, the player can be expected to have the same expectation for the execution of the reach announcement in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

  In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59-21, if the same number of times of variable display effect is performed, the reach announcement is executed at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to determine is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the production during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach advance notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined for the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect is monotonous. Can be suppressed.

(Modification 2 of Examples 2 to 4)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the effect example A, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variation pattern of the normal reach and the super reach is targeted and the normal reach start timing is changed from the start timing of the variable display. The form in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period up to the start timing of the reach effect and in the second period after the first period is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of one, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily performing the variable design once and then restarting the variable display during the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display during the multiple variable display is pseudo-variable multiple times of the variable display. You may make it perform at the timing according to the re-changing of the decorative pattern in the changing pattern accompanied by the pseudo-relation effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 59-25 as a modified example 2, for all the variation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach and super reach, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach. There is a first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern, and a second period after the first period and corresponding to a re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the first decorative pattern, After the second period, the variable display effect can be executed with the third period corresponding to the re-variable display period after the temporary stop of the third decorative pattern.

  In the second modification, the first period is exemplified to be executed before the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. It is executed in response to the re-variable display in the temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second period is executed in accordance with the re-variable display in the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and the third period is in the temporary stop of the third decorative pattern. It may be executed according to the re-variable display.

  In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, for the first period, any one of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the change pattern. The effect type of the effect during variable display is determined according to whether it is set to, and for the second period and the third period, variable display is performed based on the set value only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. A process for determining the type of effect is executed.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the variation pattern in the first period (does not determine execution of the reach warning). It should be noted that the setting suggestion (high) is set to have a higher execution ratio as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. In the second period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the setting suggestion (high) is set to have a higher execution ratio as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6. In the third period, only when the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the setting suggestion (high) is set to have a higher execution ratio as the set value increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.

  Further, the rate of determining the setting suggestion in the second period or the third period is set to be lower than the rate of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, while the reach announcement is determined in the first period. By setting the proportion of determining the reach announcement in the second period or the third period to be higher than the proportion, the reach announcement is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed. Become.

  As described above, in the second modification, when performing the variable display effect in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period or the second period is selected. When performing the variable display effect in three periods, at least one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on the variation pattern. That is, since the determination reference used when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period, the second period, and the third period, it is possible to prevent the variable display effect from becoming monotonous.

  Specifically, the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-representation is a variation pattern in which the jackpot expectation degree becomes higher as the number of re-variable display increases in the order of 1, 2, 3 ... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first re-variable display, it is highly likely that the variation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach announcement, and the second re-variable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, the variation pattern is likely to be non-reach, but there is also the possibility of normal reach. Therefore, the setting suggestion is given priority over the reach announcement, and the third revariance is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, the variation pattern has a high possibility of super-reach, so the reach warning is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

  By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the fact that the reach announcement is frequently generated and the reliability of the reach announcement is lowered in the case of a variation pattern involving one or two pseudo continuous effects. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation for a big hit from being lowered due to frequent setting suggestions in the case of a variation pattern involving three pseudo continuous effects.

  Further, in the second modification, in the first period in which the jackpot reliability is the lowest, execution of setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement according to the set value regardless of the variation pattern, so the setting suggestion is preferable. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach warning is set depending on whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Since the priority is given to the decision, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

  In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate higher than the reach announcement in the first period. If so, execution of setting suggestion does not have to be determined at a rate of 100%. In the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate higher than that of the reach announcement, but the execution of the reach announcement may be determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion. Also, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate of 100% has been illustrated, but if the execution of the reach announcement is determined at a rate higher than the set suggestion in the third period, the reach announcement is made. The execution does not have to be determined at 100%.

  In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement according to the set value in the first period regardless of the variation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the variation pattern is determined. The execution of the advance notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion depending on whether it is a normal reach or a super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement according to the set value. In the third period, the reach announcement is executed according to whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

  Further, in the second modified example, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach announcement in accordance with the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of In the first number of times (for example, in the first period or the second period), if the setting suggestion or the reach announcement is determined at least according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the variation pattern is set. The reach announcement may be decided.

  Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notification is determined prior to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the variation pattern is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the second number (eg, the second period or the third period) after the first number in the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the variation pattern. If so, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the variation pattern.

  Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect performed in the first period, the setting suggestion is set by setting the rate at which execution of setting suggestion is determined to be higher than the rate at which the reach announcement is determined. Although a mode in which execution is preferentially determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 59-2 as a first embodiment, during variable display during execution in the first period. As an effect, the execution of setting suggestion may be prioritized and decided depending on the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

  In addition, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect performed in the second period, the reach announcement is made by setting the rate at which the execution of the reach announcement is determined to be higher than the rate at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although a mode in which execution is preferentially determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as illustrated in FIG. 59-2 as Example 1, during variable display during execution in the second period. As the effect, the execution of the reach announcement may be prioritized and determined depending on the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

  The effect example A has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any modification or addition within the scope of the present invention is included in the present invention. .

  For example, in the effect example A, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach announcements and setting suggestions may be given. It may be executable over the variable display.

  Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about variable display (for example, a display result (including a big hit type) and a random value for determining a variation pattern) whose execution is held when a start winning is generated. The display control and the variation pattern are prefetched based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can: When the pre-reading notice production that gives notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target change) based on the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. Reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target change is executed over multiple variable displays until it is started. It may be.

  Further, in the effect example A, the effect control CPU 120 causes the plurality of images Z1 showing the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect to be variably displayed in 277 at predetermined timing. The embodiment in which the process of changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process to the image Z2 indicating that the image Z1 is destroyed and dropped has been exemplified. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image changes to the image Z2 at a timing corresponding to the operation. You may allow it.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the effective operation period of the push button 31B. As an operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image such as “continuous hit!” Or a button image) may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  When the specific operation of operating push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B during the operation valid period of push button 31B, effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate push button 31B. Regardless of whether the push button 31B is operated, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In this case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the variable display effect may be ended without giving a reach announcement or setting suggestion.

  By doing so, the player who knows the specific action can perform the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

  In addition, as the operation promotion effect for promoting the operation of the push button 31B by the player during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, a mode of displaying an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the push button 31B by the player in the display area of the image display device 5. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 in which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by, for example, illuminating a light emitting portion or the like built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 which the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific operation or the player who is aware of the light emission can see the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the production example A, the form in which the reach notice that suggests the possibility of the reach is applied is illustrated as the predetermined production in which the production result becomes the advantageous state suggestion result, but the present invention is not limited to this. There is not a predetermined effect that is an advantageous state suggestion result, a stop symbol notice that suggests which symbol the symbol being variably displayed stops, a character notice that the character appears, or a step in which the notice image changes in stages Various notification effects can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of a big hit, such as an advance notification or a group notification in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

  Further, in the effect example A, the variable display effect has a common common effect period for the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, but the reach announcement and the setting suggestion have different effect modes (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate effect (specifically, there is no period of time) (specifically, the reach announcement is suggested using a character, the setting suggestion is suggested by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach announcement and the setting suggestion having different effect modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach announcement may be executed prior to the setting suggestion.

  For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 in the same period (at the same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image can be improved by making the display area of the first effect image larger than the display area of the second effect image or by changing the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast. It is also possible to execute the reach warning with priority over the setting suggestion by increasing the visibility of the second effect image.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image in a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn in the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion is drawn in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer in the image display device 5 are drawn. When the generated image is combined and displayed in an overlapping manner, the first effect image is displayed in an overlapping manner with the second effect image, so that the visibility of the first effect image is higher than that of the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach warning prior to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance of the second effect image to be higher than the transmittance of the first effect image, it is possible to execute the reach warning with priority over the setting suggestion.

  In addition, by changing the sound mode such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R between the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement corresponds to the suggestion setting. May be made to be more audible than the sound effect, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach warning may be heard more easily than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of enhancing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but the audibility is enhanced by decreasing the volume of other sounds such as BGM. Good. Note that the sound effect corresponding to the reach announcement is output but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control of outputting effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. In addition, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced on the first reproduction channel The audibility of the first effect sound is improved by making the volume and sound quality different (improve) from the volume and sound quality of the second effect sound reproduced on the second reproduction channel. Higher than audibility of 2 effect sound, it is also possible to execute in preference settings suggested reach notice.

  In addition, by changing the light emission mode such as the light emission color, lighting mode, and brightness of the game effect lamp 9 between the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emission aspect corresponding to the reach announcement can be visually recognized for the effect suggestion. It is also possible to make it easier to visually recognize the light emission mode corresponding to the reach warning than the light emission mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. Note that the light is turned on in response to the reach announcement, but turned off without turning on the light in response to the setting suggestion.

  In other words, that the reach announcement is executed with priority over the setting suggestion, as described in the above-described effect examples A1 to A4 and modification examples 1 and 2, the effect result is one of the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result. In addition to increasing the execution rate of reach announcement in the case of, if the production result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the display mode of the reach notice, sound, light Including prioritization. Furthermore, executing the reach warning with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, the display, and the sound are set so that the effect of the reach announcement given to the player is higher than the effect of the set suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing with different production modes such as light, movement of the movable body.

  Further, in the effect example A, the setting suggestion exemplifies a mode in which the setting value being set is suggested as the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103 may be suggestion that the set value may be changed or the set value may not be changed (deferred).

  Further, in the production example A, the example in which the big hit game state is applied is illustrated as an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and prize balls are paid out more than in the normal state. A high base state (time saving state) where conditions are easily established, a high probability game state (high probability state) with a high probability of being a big hit game state, a high-probability low base state (latent latency change state), a special reach state (for example, , Super reach, etc.), a state in which the variation pattern is a variation pattern based on the jackpot variation pattern, and the like.

  In the production example A, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is a gaming machine. The number of balls used for the game is subtracted while the number of balls used for the game is added while the number of balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's lending request and the number of prize balls awarded according to the prize are added. The present invention can be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that is stored by being stored. It should be noted that since points and points are given to the player instead of the game balls in these enclosed gaming machines, these given points and points correspond to the game value.

  Further, in the embodiment example A, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

(Production example B of a pachinko machine)
Next, a description will be given of a performance example B executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the setting function capable of setting the set value described in the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. In effect example B, it is possible to execute a notice effect that gives a notice or suggests that the display result will be a big hit (that the big hit game state will be controlled) during execution of the variable display, and the appearance rate is appropriately adjusted. To be done. In addition, in production example B, in order to simplify the description, it is assumed that three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as set values.

  Whether or not the notice effect is executed is determined in the variable display start setting process of step S171 shown in FIG. 8 when the variable display is started, depending on whether or not the display result is a big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 whose setting can be changed, the larger the set value, the higher the probability of a big hit. The notice effect (especially the notice effect with high reliability that is a big hit) is easy to be executed when the display result is a big hit, so if you decide whether to execute it at an equal rate regardless of the set value, the set value The higher is, the higher the appearance rate of the notice production and the higher the reliability. Note that, in this embodiment, the reliability refers to the jackpot reliability, and refers to the ratio of the jackpot when the notice effect is executed.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect may be different from the intended one due to the blurring due to the set value, or the reliability may change and the player may be confused. Therefore, in production example B, at least one of the appearance rate of the notice effect and the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range by adjusting (changing) the execution rate of the notice effect according to the set value. are doing. As a result, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect can be set as intended, and it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the notice effect. Further, it is possible to prevent the set value from being unnecessarily suggested by the execution frequency of the notice effect.

  When adjusting the appearance rate of the notice production and the reliability, it may be difficult to completely match the fractions below the decimal point. Therefore, the invention according to the embodiment B includes not only those having the same appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect but also those adjusted within the substantially same range. Note that the same effect as in the case of being the same can be obtained within the substantially same range. The substantially same range may be within a predetermined range, and may be within a predetermined error range (for example, plus or minus 5%, etc.), or the appearance rate or reliability of the notice effect perceived by the player. May be within substantially the same range so that they are perceived as the same.

  FIG. 60-1 is a diagram showing an example of the execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice X as the notice effect in the effect example B. FIG. 60-1 (A) shows an example in which the appearance rate of the notice X and the reliability are not adjusted. In this embodiment, three levels of "1" to "3" are provided as set values. As shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), in this embodiment, the jackpot probability a is "1/300" when the set value is "1", "1/250" when the set value is "2", and the set value In the case of "3", it is "1/200". The execution rate b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is "50/100" regardless of the set value. Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all fluctuations) A (= big hit probability a × execution ratio b) when the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit is “1/600” when the set value is “1”, and the set value is “2” In the case of, the value is "1/500", and in the case of the set value "3", it is "1/400".

  The loss probability c (= 1-big hit probability a) is "299/300" when the set value is "1", "249/250" when the set value is "2", and "199" when the set value is "3". / 200 ". The execution rate d of the notice X at the time of loss is "1/100". Therefore, the ratio (proportion to total fluctuation) B (= miss probability c × execution ratio d) at which the notice X is executed and loses is about “1/100” at any setting value.

  The appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in all changes is "7/600" when the setting value is "1", "6/500" when the setting value is "2", and "5" when the setting value is "3". / 400 ”. The reliability D (= A / C) of the notice X is "1/7" (about 14%) when the setting value is "1" and "1/6" (about 17%) when the setting value is "2". ), When the set value is "3", it is "1/5" (20%).

  In this way, when the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) is the same without adjustment regardless of the set value, the higher the set value, the appearance rate of the notice effect, and the higher reliability. In particular, when the reliability is set to "2" as a reference, an error of plus or minus 3% occurs.

  FIG. 60-1 (B) shows an example in which the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice X are adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (B), unlike the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the execution rate b of the notice X at the time of a big hit is “60/100” when the set value is “1”, When the set value is "2", it is "50/100", and when the set value is "3", it is "40/100". The execution rate d of the notice X at the time of loss is "3/299" when the setting value is "1", "2.5 / 249" when the setting value is "2", and "2" when the setting value is "3". / 199 ”.

  By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all changes becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. Further, the reliability D of the notice X is "1/6" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect from changing in accordance with the set value, resulting in an unintended ratio, and it is possible to appropriately execute the notice effect. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the notice production.

  In this embodiment, the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice X are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range as the notice effect regardless of the set value. Such advanced adjustments are made for highly reliable preliminary announcements and special special announcements (that is, some preliminary announcements), and for other preliminary announcements, the execution rate is not adjusted The appearance rate and the reliability may be changed. That is, other notice effects may be executed at the same execution rate regardless of the set value. By doing this, compared to the case of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability for all the notice effects, the burden of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability is generated, and the processing load for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect. Can be prevented from increasing.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (B), the execution rate d of the notice X at the time of loss is different, but even if the notice X is the same as shown in FIG. Since the ratio B of being executed and losing becomes approximately 1/100 which is almost the same regardless of the set value, the appearance rate C of the notice X is also substantially the same (about 1.17% to 1.25%). The execution ratio d of the notice X at the time of loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  In this case, by adjusting only the execution rate b of the notice X at the time of a big hit, the appearance rate C and the reliability D of the notice X can be set within the same or substantially the same range. In this way, by making the execution ratio of the notice production at the time of loss that accounts for most of the total variation common, it is not necessary to judge the set value for each variation of the loss and change the execution ratio. It is possible to reduce the control load for executing.

  FIG. 60-1 (C) shows an example in which the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (C), unlike the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the execution rate d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2/149" when the set value is "2", and "1.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution rate b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

  By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice X in all changes becomes "6/500" regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or unnecessarily suggesting the set value depending on the execution frequency of the notice production. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate at the time of a big hit can be maintained.

  In this case, the appearance rate C of the advance notice X is the same regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 60-3 (C), the reliability of the advance notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide the game property according to the set value. In addition, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, the reliability can be estimated and the set value can be estimated, so that the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be expected to improve. The reliability depending on the set value may be changed relatively large (about ± 10%) such as 30% to 50% by adjusting the appearance rates. This makes it easier to guess the set value.

  FIG. 60-1 (D) shows an example in which the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same. In the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (D), unlike the example shown in FIG. 60-1 (A), the execution rate d of the notice X at the time of loss is "2.5 / 299" when the set value is "1". , "2.5 / 249" when the set value is "2", and "2.5 / 199" when the set value is "3". The execution rate b of the notice X at the time of a big hit remains "50/100" regardless of the set value.

  By doing so, the reliability D of the notice X becomes "1/6" regardless of the set value. By doing so, the same reliability can be notified by the advance notice X regardless of the set value. Further, the occupancy rate of the notice X in the case of a big hit can be made common, and a suitable appearance rate at the time of a big hit can be maintained.

  In this case, the reliability D of the advance notice X is the same regardless of the set value, but as shown in FIG. 60-3 (D), the appearance rate of the advance notice X changes according to the set value. Become. By doing so, it is possible to provide the game property according to the set value. Further, as the number of appearances of the notice X increases, it becomes possible to estimate the set value, so that it is possible to expect an improvement in the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  It should be noted that in FIG. 60-1 (D), the reliability of the notice X is adjusted to be the same regardless of the set value by varying the execution rate of the notice X at the time of loss according to the set value. However, by setting the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of loss to be the same regardless of the set value, and making the execution ratio of the notice X at the time of a big hit different depending on the set value, the reliability of the notice X is the same regardless of the set value. You may adjust so that it may become. In this way, by making the execution ratio of the notice production at the time of loss that accounts for most of the total variation common, it is not necessary to judge the set value for each variation of the loss and change the execution ratio. It is possible to reduce the control load for executing.

  The adjustment examples of the jackpot probability a and the notice execution rates b and d shown in FIGS. 60-1 (A) to (D) are examples. In order to make at least one of the appearance rate C and the reliability D the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value, the appearance rate C and the reliability D are the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. In addition, at least one of the notice execution rates b and d may be changed according to the set value. That is, when the appearance rate C is the same (substantially the same), the execution rate of the advance notice is set so that the appearance rate C = a × b + (1-a) × d is the same (substantially the same) regardless of the set value. At least one of b and d may be adjusted. Further, when the reliability D of the notice production is the same (substantially the same), the reliability D of the notice production is D = (axb) / (axb + (1-a) xd) regardless of the set value. It suffices that at least one of the notice execution rates b and d is adjusted so that the same is (substantially the same).

  In the execution ratio shown in FIG. 60-1, the execution ratio according to the big hit type is not considered, but when there are a plurality of big hit types, the execution ratio of the notice effect (notice X) according to the big hit type is set. You can make them different. For example, in the case where the jackpot probability a is the same as that shown in FIG. 60-1, there are a regular jackpot and a probability variation jackpot as jackpot types, and one of the jackpot types is an even proportion (50%) at the jackpot. explain.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (A), the normal jackpot probability a1 and the probability variation jackpot probability a2 are each half of the jackpot probability a in FIG. 60-1. Then, in this example, the execution rate b1 of the notice X at the time of a normal jackpot is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and "3" as the set value. In the case of “40/100”. Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all fluctuations) A1 (= normal jackpot probability a1 × execution ratio b1) that the notice X is executed and becomes a normal jackpot is “1/1000” regardless of the set value.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (A), the execution rate b2 of the notice X at the time of probability variation big hit is 50/100 (unadjusted) regardless of the set value. Therefore, if the set value "1" is set to "1/1200" and the set value "A2" (probability variation big hit probability a2 x execution rate b2) In the case of "2", it is "1/1000", and in the case of the setting value "3", it is "1/800". Then, the ratio A (= A1 + A2) in which the notice X is executed and becomes a big hit (the ratio of all fluctuations) is “44/24000” when the setting value is “1” and “48/24000 when the setting value is“ 2 ”. , And the setting value is “3”, it is “54/24000”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (B), the execution rate d of the notice X at the time of loss is “196 / (299 × 80)” when the set value is “1” and “196” when the set value is “2”. 192 / (249 × 96) ”and“ 186 / (199 × 120) ”when the setting value is“ 3 ”. Therefore, the ratio (percentage of all fluctuations) that the notice X is executed and lost is "196/24000" when the setting value is "1", "192/24000" when the setting value is "2", and the setting value " In the case of "3", it is "186/24000".

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (D), the appearance rate C (= A + B) of the notice X in all changes is “1/100” regardless of the set value. As described above, when there are a plurality of jackpot types, the appearance ratio of the notice effects is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range by changing the execution ratio of the notice effects for each jackpot type. You may By doing this, when the advance notice effect is executed while keeping the execution ratio of the advance notice effect within the same or substantially the same range, the ratio of which big hit type will be different depending on the set value. It is expected that a particular big hit (for example, a probability variation big hit) will be achieved by executing the notice production.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60-2, the appearance rate of the notice X is adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by changing the execution rate of the notice X during the normal big hit. The appearance rate C of the notice X may be adjusted to be the same (substantially the same) by changing the execution rate at each time. That is, d may be adjusted with at least one of the notice execution rates b1 and b2 so that the appearance rate C = a1 × b1 + a2 × b2 + c × d of the notice X becomes the same (substantially the same).

  The reliability D of the notice X may be the same (substantially the same) by changing the execution rate of the notice X according to the type of jackpot. In this case, regardless of the set value, the noticeability reliability D = (a1 * b1 + a2 * b2) / (a1 * b1 + a2 * b2 + ((1-a1-a2) * d)) is the same (substantially the same). Thus, it is sufficient to adjust at least one of the notice execution ratios b1 and b2 and d. By doing so, the notice effect is executed while keeping the reliability of the notice effect within the same or substantially the same range. In this case, since the proportion of which big hit category is different depends on the set value, it is expected that a particular big hit (for example, a probability big hit) will be expected by executing the advance notice effect depending on the set value.

  Further, some of the notice effects may be executed at the same execution rate regardless of the set value as the execution rate of the specific jackpot type. For example, there may be a normal big jackpot and a probabilistic big jackpot (sorting 50% of big jackpot types) as big jackpot types, and a notice Y may be executed as a notice effect to notify that the probable jackpot will be a big jackpot. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-3, in the case of a normal big hit or loss, the execution rate of the notice Y is 0/100 (0%) regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Y at the time of probability variation big hit is "60/100" when the set value is "1", "50/100" when the set value is "2", and "40/100" when the set value is "3". It is 100 ". The jackpot probability is similar to the example shown in FIG. 60-1. Therefore, the appearance rate of the notice Y of all changes is “1/1000” regardless of the set value. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice Y for notifying that the probability is a big hit at the same appearance rate regardless of the set value. In addition, it can be announced that the probability will be a big hit regardless of the set value. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, the notice Y is not executed regardless of the set value, so that the processing load can be reduced. Although not shown, the notice Y is executed only at the time of the probability variation big hit, so the reliability is 100%.

  You may make it perform the notice production which announces that it will be a probability variation big hit at the time of a loss. For example, as a notice effect, when a notice Z that gives a notice of a probability variation big hit is executed, as shown in FIG. 60-4, when a normal big hit is given, the execution ratio of the notice Z is 0 regardless of the set value. / 100 (0%). On the other hand, the execution rate b2 of the notice Z at the time of the probability variation big hit is the same as the execution rate of the notice Y shown in FIG. 60-3, and the rate at which the notice Z is executed and becomes a big hit is "1" regardless of the set value. / 1000 ". The execution rate d of the notice Z at the time of loss is "3/2990" when the setting value is "1", "2.5 / 2490" when the setting value is "2", and "2" when the setting value is "3". / 1990 ”. The ratio B at which the notice Y is lost due to execution is “1/1000” at any set value.

  By doing so, the appearance rate C of the notice Z in all changes is “2/1000” regardless of the set value. The reliability D of the notice Z is "1/2" regardless of the set value. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice Z from changing according to the set value and to prevent an unintended ratio, and when a big hit is given, a notice is given that a sudden change big hit will occur. Z can be preferably executed. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, since the notice Z is not executed regardless of the set value, the processing load can be reduced. Note that either the appearance rate of the notice Z or the reliability may differ depending on the set value.

  Next, an example of the effect operation of the notice effect will be described. The lower arrow in FIG. 60-5 (A) indicates that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. It indicates that When it is determined to execute the notice X as the notice effect, the character image CHα as shown in FIG. 60-5 (B) is displayed as a "chance" during execution of each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The notice X is issued. This allows the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state. In particular, when the reliability is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, the player can recognize that the player is likely to be controlled in an advantageous state without being aware of the set value. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (C), the decorative pattern showing the numeral 7 in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5R is stopped and the reach is established. Then, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (D), the characters “Super Reach!” Are displayed, and for example, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (E), the reach effect of the super-reach in which the character confronts is displayed. Be started. During the reach effect of the super reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (E), the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and executed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5.

  Then, for example, immediately before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (F), the notice Y or the notice Z for issuing the line "Probably change?" Of the character image CHβ is executed. It As a result, the player comes to expect a sure-change big hit. In particular, in the case of the notice Y, it is decided that the probability variation is a big hit, so that the interest is improved.

  It should be noted that when both the notice Y and the notice Z can be executed, this is a notice and suggestion that both will be a probabilistic big hit, but the display color of the dialogue and the dialogue can be discriminated by the player. It is preferable to make a part of the presentation mode such as the content different.

  Then, when the display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 60-5 (G), the fact that the teammate character has won is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 60-5 (H), a big hit combination is made. The decorative pattern is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the presentation mode of the notice production shown in FIG. 60-5 is an example, and any production mode may be used as long as it is possible to suggest / predict that a big hit or a probable variation big hit will be given.

(Modification of Production Example B)
The effect example B described above can be variously modified and applied, and further features may be added. Further, all of the configurations described in the above-described production example B are not essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Further, other features such as the performance example A may be combined as appropriate.

  In the production example B, three stages of 1 to 3 are provided as the set values, but the set values may be two stages or less or four stages or more (for example, six stages). Further, the larger the set value is, the larger the jackpot probability is, which is advantageous to the player. However, the smaller the set value is, the larger the jackpot probability is, which is advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot probability according to the set value shown in FIG. 60-1 and the like is also an example, and it may be a stepwise jackpot probability according to the set value.

  In the performance example B, the execution ratio of the notice effect is set so that at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect of all the set values (set values 1 to 3) is within the same or substantially the same range. However, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect of some of the setting values of the plurality of setting values is set to be within the same or substantially the same range. You may. For example, even if at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect of the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second set value (for example, the set value 2) is set to be within the same or substantially the same range. Good. Further, in the case where the set values are 6 levels, at least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect of the first set value group (for example, the set values 1 to 3) is set to be within the same or substantially the same range. At least one of the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect of the second set value group (for example, the set values 4 to 6) may be within the same or substantially the same range.

  In the production example B, the appearance rate and the reliability of at least some of the notice productions are set to be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value as the specific production, but the specific production is controlled in an advantageous state. It may be another production that suggests that. For example, in the case of determining the type of reach effect and the number of pseudo-repetitions on the side of the effect control board 12, the determination ratio of the reach effect type and the number of pseudo-repetitions is changed according to the set value so that the set value is changed. Instead, the appearance rate and reliability of each reach effect, and the appearance rate and reliability of each pseudo consecutive number may be controlled to be within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

  When determining whether or not to execute the notice effect, a table to which different execution ratios are assigned for each set value may be used to determine whether or not to execute the notice effect, or for determining the notice effect. A reference table may be provided, and a table corresponding to the set value may be generated by performing calculation on the table with a parameter according to the set value, and whether or not to execute the notice effect may be determined using the generated table.

  The execution rate, the appearance rate, and the reliability of the notice effect shown in FIGS. 60-1 to 60-4 are examples, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Further, as the notice effect, a notice effect other than the notice effect shown in the embodiment B may be executable. Even in such other notice effects, the appearance rate and the reliability may be within the same or substantially the same range irrespective of the set value, or the set value may be set in a part or all of the other notice effects. Regardless of the same execution rate, the appearance rate and reliability may be changed according to the set value. For example, of the notice productions having a relatively high reliability among the notice productions, the appearance rate and the confidence degree are set to be the same or substantially within the same range irrespective of the set value so that the noticeability is relatively low or the appearance rate is relatively high. For the high notice performance, the same execution ratio may be used regardless of the set value. By doing this, the control load for determining whether or not to execute the notice effect is compared with the case where the appearance rate and the reliability are within the same or substantially the same range for all the notice effects regardless of the set value. Can be reduced.

  In addition, regarding a specific notice effect of a plurality of types of notice effects, it is executed even if there is a loss with some setting values, and it is not executed (or is executed if there is a loss with other setting values). It may be difficult. For example, a specific notice effect having a high reliability (for example, a big hit probability of 90% or more) is not executed at the time of losing in the case of a low set value (for example, 1 to 3 in the case of 6 stages), and a high set value (for example In cases of 4 to 6) in the case of 6 stages, it may be possible to execute at the time of losing. By doing so, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect due to a loss even though the specific notice effect has been executed, and it is possible to suggest / inform that the set value is high.

  In the diagrams shown in FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2, the execution rate of the notice X is shown as the notice effect, but after determining whether or not to execute the notice effect according to the display result, the type of the notice effect (effect pattern ) May be determined. In this case, even when determining the type of notice effect, the execution ratio of each notice effect is set to a set value so that the appearance rate and reliability of each notice effect are within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. You may make it different according to it.

  In the production example B, whether or not to execute the notice is determined regardless of the variation pattern at the time of losing, but at the time of losing, it is determined according to the variation pattern (presence or absence of reach, type, presence or absence of pseudo-repeating and number of times). The execution ratio of the notice production may be different.

  In production example B, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state was not taken into consideration, but even in the probability variation state, the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice production may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. . Further, the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range depending on the game state regardless of the set value. For example, in the probability change state (high-probability state) in which the probability of being a big hit is high and the notice production is likely to be executed, the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice production are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value, Such adjustment may not be performed in the normal state (low accuracy state). Further, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be different between different game states, or may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. For example, if the background is not shared between the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to make a distinction. ) Appearance rate and reliability may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. Furthermore, regardless of the set value, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect (specific notice effect) may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range. By doing so, it is possible to prevent recognition of a gaming state that cannot be visually recognized based on the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect.

  In the effect example B, when there are a normal big hit and a probability variation big hit as big hit types, the appearance rate and reliability of the notice effect are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range depending on the big hit type regardless of the set value. It was. The difference of the big hit type may be the size of the number of rounds of the big hit, or the difference in the length of the time saving state or the probability changing state controlled to the big hit game state.

  When a small hit is provided as the display result and the notice effect is executed even when the small hit occurs, the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of a big hit and at the time of losing is changed according to the set value, as in effect example B. In addition, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of a small hit according to the set value, even if the appearance rate or the reliability of the notice effect is adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. Good. For example, in a small hitting game state, a specific area is provided in the winning opening, and in the gaming machine that controls to the big hitting game state based on passing the specific area in the small hitting game state, it is announced that it will be a small hit Since it can be said that the notice effect to be performed is a notice of a big hit, the appearance ratio and the reliability of the notice effect to give a notice of a small hit may be adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value. In this case, when changing the small hit probability according to the set value, by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect in consideration of the small hit probability according to the set value, the appearance rate or reliability of the notice effect Just adjust the degree. Specifically, in consideration of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability according to the set value, the big hit time, the small hit time, and by changing the execution ratio of the notice effect at the time of the loss according to the set value, It suffices to adjust the appearance rate and the reliability of the notice effect within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value.

  If it is possible to execute the notice effect for each of the multiple changes of the pseudo-relation, the appearance rate and the reliability are adjusted within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value only for the notice effect in the final change of the pseudo-relation. You may. By doing so, it is possible to design the notice effect more easily and reduce the processing load than in the case of adjusting the appearance rate and the reliability for all the fluctuations of the pseudo-relation.

  In production example B, only the big hit probability changes with the set value, but the production control board 12 may change the production mode and the execution ratio of the production depending on the set value. For example, even with the same variation pattern, different reach effects, pseudo effects, and other effects during variable display may be executed based on the set values. By doing so, the effect mode can suggest the set value by the execution ratio of the effect.

(Explanation regarding association of a plurality of embodiments)
Although various embodiments (examples and modified examples) have been described above, the configurations according to the respective embodiments may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations according to the other embodiments. . The configuration combined in this way or the individual configuration not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other embodiments.

  For example, the configuration according to the modification C (the configuration in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in the common storage area) and / or the configuration according to the modification D (the configuration in which the timer update process is shared) are modified. You may combine with the structure (The structure which restores the specific command which processed the numerical data on the effect control side) concerning B. By doing so, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

  Further, the configuration according to the modified example C (the configuration in which the big hit flag and the small hit flag are stored in a common storage area) is the configuration of the second embodiment (which has a setting function and can be controlled in the KT state in a pachinko game). It may be combined with the machine 1). Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a setting function and can be controlled in the KT state, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is compressed due to the setting function, The frequency of hits increases. Therefore, the configuration according to the modification C becomes more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment as described above. That is, even if the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is pressed due to the provision of the setting function and the frequency of small hits is high, a small hit flag different from the big hit flag is LD (loaded) each time. Since it is not necessary to perform), LD commands and the like can be reduced, and pressure on the capacity of the main side can be reduced.

  Further, the configuration according to the modified example D (configuration that shares the timer update processing) may be combined with the configuration of the second embodiment (a pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a setting function and can be controlled to the KT state). Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has a setting function and can be controlled in the KT state, the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is compressed due to the setting function, The frequency of hits increases. Therefore, the configuration according to the modification D becomes more effective when applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment as described above. That is, since the capacity of the main side (main board 11) is squeezed by the provision of the setting function and the frequency of small hits is high, even if the subroutine for small hits is called frequently, it is used in the subroutine. Since the timer value to be updated is updated by one timer update process, the compression efficiency of the process is increased and the pressure on the capacity on the main side can be reduced.

  Further, the configuration of the modification C and the configuration of the modification D may be combined and combined with the configuration of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a setting function). In this way, by combining the modification C and the modification D, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the gaming machine in which the capacity on the main side is compressed by providing the setting function.

(Explanation Regarding Means for Solving the Problems of the Present Invention)
Although various embodiments have been described above, the embodiments described above include the gaming machines described in the following means.

The gaming machine described in Means A1
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
With game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 5) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state,
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical value range of the big hit is the normal state). (It is set as a continuous numerical value range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value, regardless of whether it is a probability change state)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A2 is the gaming machine described in means A1,
A storage unit (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying the set value set by the setting unit;
The advantageous state determination means reads the set value information stored in the storage means every time it determines whether or not to control the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 performs the special symbol normal processing step shown in FIG. 39). (A portion that executes the process of S550), the advantageous state determination value included in the non-common numerical value range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information, together with the advantageous state determination value included in the common numerical value range, It is set as an advantageous state determination value for determining whether or not the determination random number values generated by the determination random number generation means match (for example, the CPU 103 performs the process of step S556 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39). In the above, a part for setting the display result determination table according to the set value read in the process of step S550)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value is repeatedly set every time it is determined by the advantageous state determination means whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set. It is possible to prevent inappropriate determination.

The gaming machine of means A3 is the gaming machine described in means A2,
The storage means can store the setting value information read from the storage means by the advantageous state determining means as determination used setting value information (for example, the CPU 103 has a step of special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39). In the process of S566, the setting value used in the process of step S550 is updated and stored as a determined used setting value),
Collation capable of collating for every predetermined period whether or not the set value information stored in the storage means is the same as the determined used set value information stored in the immediately previous determination by the advantageous state determination means. It is characterized by further comprising means (for example, the CPU 103 compares the set value specified in the process of step S550 with the determined used set value in the process of step S552 shown in FIG. 39).
According to this feature, it is possible to specify that the inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set by the inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of means A4 is the gaming machine described in means A3,
The collation unit performs collation every time the advantageous state determination unit determines whether to control the advantageous state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 executes variable display). (The part that executes the process of step S552 for each)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, collation is performed every time the advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so that it is possible to more accurately specify that an inappropriate advantageous state determination value is set.

The gaming machine of means A5 is the gaming machine described in means A3 or means A4,
An error notification unit capable of executing an error notification indicating that the setting value information is abnormal when the comparison result of the comparison unit is not the same (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the error notification process). Therefore, the image display device 5 is provided with a portion for displaying a notification image corresponding to an error).
According to this feature, the fact that the setting value information is abnormal can be recognized around the gaming machine, and the abnormal setting value information can be dealt with quickly.

The gaming machine of means A6 is the gaming machine described in means A5,
The game control means controls the game to an inoperable state in which the game is incapable when the result of the collation by the collating means is not the same, and error notification information indicating that the set value information is abnormal. Output to the error notifying unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, when the CPU 103 determines that the set value and the determined used set value do not match as the comparison result in step S552, the process proceeds to loop processing. Part and a part that executes the process of step S554 and transmits an error designation command to the effect control board 12),
The error notification means can execute the error notification based on the output of the error notification information by the game control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes an error designation command from the CPU 103 in the error notification process). Which determines whether or not the error designation command has been received, and executes an error notification according to the received error designation command when the error designation command is received)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the inappropriate game from being executed by the determination based on the inappropriate setting value information.

The gaming machine of means A7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A6,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state for each variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 39, a variable display result determination module is used every time the CPU 103 executes the variable display. The part that determines the variable display result),
Pending storage means capable of storing the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination when the variable display execution condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. Portion for executing the processing of S510),
Prior to the determination by the advantageous state determination means, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state based on the pending storage (for example, the CPU 103 shows the winning randomness shown in FIG. 38). Part that executes numerical judgment processing),
Further equipped with,
The pre-determination unit performs the pre-determination by performing a process common to the process for determining whether or not the advantageous state determination unit controls the advantageous state (for example, when the CPU 103 wins a prize). (The part that determines the variable display result using the variable display result determination module even in the random number determination process)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, a part of the processing of the advantageous state determination means and the processing of the pre-determination means can be shared, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit gaming state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state,
Storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing set value information capable of specifying the set value set by the setting means;
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
Further equipped with,
The game control means can control the special state based on the fact that the special state determination means determines to control the special state (for example, based on the fact that the variable display result is a small hit). The part which controls the value of the figure process flag to 8 "and controls to the small hitting game state),
The special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, is a common value that continues from a special reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so as to be the numerical range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is the small hit determination value with 32767 as the small hit reference value. Part set as common numerical range),
The special state determination means determines whether to control the special state according to the special state determination value included in the common numerical value range regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The setting value information stored in the storage means is read out every time, and the special state determination value included in the common numerical value range corresponding to the setting value specified from the read setting value information is set (for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the range of 32767 to 33094 regardless of the set value, and the variation special figure is the second special symbol. In the case of a design, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is a range of 32767 to 33421 regardless of the set value, but the CPU 103 always sets the set value from the RAM 102 when executing the variable display. Reading, determining whether or not part the read setting value variable display result by setting the display result determination table corresponding to become small hit)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the processing load for determining whether to control the special state can be reduced, and the advantageous state determination means sets the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information. In this case, since the process of setting the advantageous state determination value and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value specified from the set value information can be shared, the capacity of the processing program can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A8,
For the set value with the lowest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value is not set (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). If the set value that is set is 1, the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value is not set)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, for the setting value that is the most unfavorable to the player, it is sufficient to determine whether or not to control the advantageous state by targeting only the common numerical value range of the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Determination random number generating means (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit 207SG154) capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state,
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
With game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state,
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical value range of the big hit is the normal state). (It is set as a continuous numerical value range with 1020 as a jackpot reference value, regardless of whether it is a probability change state)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation unit and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of values for controlling to the advantageous state, in the present invention, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the value, the advantageous state determination means, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state. You can

The gaming machine of means A11 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A10,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state on the basis of having been determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state determination means, the probability of being determined to control to the advantageous state, the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value A game control capable of controlling to a normal state corresponding to a normal number which is a number or a special state corresponding to a special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number on the basis of becoming the advantageous state. Means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit. The range from 1020 as the reference value to 1253 which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as a continuous numerical value range),
The advantageous state determination value, in the predetermined numerical range, regardless of the normal state or the special state, is set to be a numerical range continuous from the predetermined reference value (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the big hit is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the big hit reference value regardless of whether it is the normal state or the probability variation state).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the determination random number value generated by the determination random number value generation unit and the advantageous state determination While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of values for controlling to the advantageous state, in the present invention, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are predetermined criteria. Since it is set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the value, the advantageous state determination means, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number generation means. Since it is only necessary to perform the determination whether or not to control to the advantageous state based on the continuous numerical value range including the range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state. You can
Further, for example, whether the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random number value is the advantageous state determination value When it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes the predetermined reference value, The state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A11,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state),
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state when it is determined by the advantageous state determination means to control to the advantageous state, and it is possible to control to the special state when it is determined to be controlled to the special state by the special state determination means. With game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numeric range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a predetermined common numerical value range, and the non-common numerical value range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to It is set including the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is 1253 is set as a continuous numerical range),
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set with 32767 as the small hit reference value. Is the part that is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value)
When performing the variable display of the first identification information, the special state determination means determines whether to control the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, whether to control the small hit game state with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value When performing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not the special state is controlled by the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, whether to control the small hitting gaming state with the 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value Part that determines whether),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, they are set so as to be a numerical range continuous from the common second reference value (for example, in FIGS. 19 to 22). As shown, when the fluctuation special map is the first special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 328, and when the fluctuation special map is the second special symbol, the small hit judgment is made. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of values is 655, but the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value is the common value 32767 as a small hitting reference value regardless of the variation special figure.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is necessary to perform only one determination based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state. The processing load to perform can be reduced .
Further, for example, whether the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value (the random number value for determination is the special state determination value). When it is determined that the special state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value. Since the special state determination means can determine whether to control the special state by only specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the second reference value according to the variation special map, It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means A13 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A12,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantage state determining means determining to control to the advantage state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numeric range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a predetermined common numerical value range, and the non-common numerical value range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to It is set including the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is 1253 is set as a continuous numerical range),
The special state determination value is continued from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value with the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set regardless of the set value set by the setting means so as to be the second common numerical range (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range for small hits is In a range different from the numerical range of the big hit determination value when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, if the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, 32767 is always used as the small hit reference value of 3267 to It is set as a continuous numerical value range of 33094, and if the fluctuation special figure is the second special symbol, 32767 is always set as a small numerical value reference value of 3267 to 33421 as a continuous numerical value range. It is to have part)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
Especially, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change due to the influence of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment value depends on the set value. Since it is possible to always specify the numerical range of 1 in the same range, it is possible to reduce the processing load of determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is necessary to perform only one determination based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state. The processing load to perform can be reduced .
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the numerical value ranges of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generation means On the other hand, it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the special state based on a plurality of times, while in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since it only has to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
Setting values of a plurality of stages including at least an advantageous determination value and a disadvantageous determination value with different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value (for example, a normal state or a time saving state) or the advantageous state. Based on the state, the game control means (for example, CPU 103 is a figure which can be controlled to a special state corresponding to the special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number (for example, the probability variation state)). 6) a portion for executing special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numeric range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a predetermined common numerical value range, and the non-common numerical value range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to It is set including the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is 1253 is set as a continuous numerical range),
The advantageous state determination value is set in the predetermined numerical range to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value regardless of the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the big hit is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the big hit reference value regardless of whether it is the normal state or the probability variation state),
The special state determination value is a second reference different from the first reference value in a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the set value having the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state. The same number is set so as to be the second common numerical value range continuous from the value, regardless of the set value set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is the numerical range of the large hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, 020 to 1346 or 1024 to 1674. In a range different from the numerical range of, if the variation special map is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, it is always 327. 7 is set as a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33094 with a small hit reference value, and if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the set value or the gaming state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probability changing state. Regardless of this, the part that is always set as a numerical value range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means is Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so that the processing load for determining whether to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, since the numerical range of the special state judgment value does not change according to the set value to be set, the special state judgment means always uses the numerical value range of the special state judgment value as a numerical range regardless of the set value. Since it suffices to specify the same numerical range, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the common numerical value of the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value. The process of determining whether to control to the advantageous state is performed because the determination of whether to control to the advantageous state needs to be performed only once based on the continuous numerical range including the range and the non-common numerical range. The load can be reduced.
In addition, for example, when the second common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, each numerical value of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number generating means is set. On the other hand, it is necessary to execute the determination as to whether or not to control the special state based on the range a plurality of times. On the other hand, in the present invention, the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value is a continuous numerical value range from the second reference value. The special state determination means controls the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the second common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since the determination as to whether or not it is necessary to be performed only once, the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A15 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
With game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state,
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting value ( It is set including the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, which is a range up to values corresponding to 2 to 6 values excluding 1),
The common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and a range of 1020 to 1237 is a big hit determination. Part that is set to the common numerical value range),
The non-common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range (for example, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46. As described above, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value with 60000 as a reference value)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probabilities of being set can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value. Particularly, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, or By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the state determination value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, the non-common value range is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value can be further reduced. You can

The gaming machine of means A16 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to 6 which is the most advantageous setting value to the player). Setting value) (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 31),
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
With game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state,
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical value range, a common numerical value range common to the respective setting values that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237), Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of different non-common numerical value ranges (for example, 1238 to values corresponding to each setting value (1 to 6 values)) that can be set by the setting means. ) And are set,
The common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and a range of 1020 to 1237 is a big hit determination. Part that is set to the common numerical value range),
The non-common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from a specific reference value different from the predetermined reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range (for example, shown in FIGS. 45 and 46. As described above, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value with 60000 as a reference value)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set as the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value, and only the non-common numerical range is changed to control the advantageous state for each set value. Since the probabilities of being set can be made different, it is possible to reduce the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value. Particularly, in the present invention, the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value is set to the minimum value of the non-common numerical value range and is set to a value larger than the maximum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, or By setting the reference value of the non-common numerical value range of the state determination value to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range and a value smaller than the minimum value of the common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, the non-common value range is set according to the set value. Even if the number of advantageous state determination values included in the numerical range increases, the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value do not overlap, so the development load of the gaming machine regarding the set value can be further reduced. You can

The gaming machine of means A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A16,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
At least a plurality of setting values including advantageous setting values and disadvantage setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player, and 1 is the most advantageous setting value to the player). Setting means capable of setting any one of the set values (for example, the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31);
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantage state determining means determining to control to the advantage state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value has at least a common numerical value range common to all setting values that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237) in a predetermined numerical value range. Is set,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit. The range from 1020 as the reference value to 1253 which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as a continuous numerical value range),
The special state determination value is set to the same number in a continuous range from the range of the advantageous state determination value regardless of the setting value set by the setting means (for example, shown in FIGS. 43 and 44). Thus, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is set to the numerical range including 328 judgment values consecutively to the numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
Particularly in the present invention, since the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value and the numerical range of the special state determination value are continuously set, the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generating means is the advantageous state determination. Whether the value or the value between the minimum and maximum values of the special condition judgment value (whether it is within the numerical range of the advantageous condition judgment value or the value within the numerical range of the special condition judgment value When determining whether to control to the advantageous state or the special state based on (whether or not), the random number for determination generated by the random number generation means for determination is the minimum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value. Whether or not it is a value between the maximum value of the numerical range of the special state judgment value, or the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is the maximum value of the numerical range of the advantageous state judgment value. And whether it is a value between the maximum value of the numeric value range of the special state judgment value Therefore, it is possible to determine at a time whether to control to the advantageous state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the processing load determines whether to control the advantageous state or the special state and the process to determine whether to control the special state. The load can be reduced.

The gaming machine of means A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A17,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state),
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantage state determining means determining to control to the advantage state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numeric range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a predetermined common numerical value range, and the non-common numerical value range that is not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to It is set including the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value corresponding to each set value,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is 1253 is set as a continuous numerical range),
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so that it becomes the continuous second common numerical range,
The advantageous state determination value is set to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value in the predetermined numerical value range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the setting value, 32767 is set). (A portion where the range from 32767 to 33094 is set as a common numerical range of the small hitting determination value) as the small hitting reference value),
When performing the variable display of the first identification information, the special state determination means determines whether to control the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, whether to control the small hit game state with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value When performing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not the special state is controlled by the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, whether to control the small hitting gaming state with the 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value Part that determines whether),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, a setting that has the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, when the variation special map is the first special symbol, the numerical range of the small hit determination value The number of judgment values included in is 328, and the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655 when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, but the numerical value of the small hit judgment value The range is different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and 32767 is set as the small hit reference value. , The fluctuation special map is the first special If a symbol is set in the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, part when the variation JP diagram is the second special symbol is set in the numerical range of 32,767 to 33,421)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means is Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so that the processing load for determining whether to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is necessary to perform only one determination based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state. The processing load to perform can be reduced .
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the numerical value ranges of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generation means On the other hand, it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the special state based on a plurality of times, while in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since it only has to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random number value is the advantageous state determination value When it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes the first reference value, The advantageous state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the first reference value depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value (the random number value for determination is the special state determination value). When it is determined that the special state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value. Since the special state determination means can determine whether to control the special state by only specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the second reference value according to the variation special map, It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means A19 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A18,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled between a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state),
At least a plurality of setting values including advantageous setting values and disadvantage setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, 1 is the most disadvantageous setting value to the player, and 1 is the most advantageous setting value to the player). Setting means capable of setting any one of the set values (for example, the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31);
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantageous state determining means determining to control to the advantageous state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is a normal state corresponding to a normal number that is the number of advantageous state determination values corresponding to a set value (for example, a normal state or a time saving state) or the advantageous state. Based on the state, the game control means (for example, CPU 103 is a figure which can be controlled to a special state corresponding to the special number which is the number of advantageous state determination values increased with respect to the normal number (for example, the probability variation state)). 6) a portion for executing special symbol process processing),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numeric range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The first common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the set value is 2, 1020 is a big hit reference value, and the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the big hit judgment value is 1253 is set as a continuous numerical range),
As the special state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means, from a second reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, regardless of the set value, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to 32767 as the small hit reference value. (The part that is set as the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value),
The advantageous state determination value is set in the predetermined numerical range to be a continuous numerical range from the first reference value regardless of the normal state or the special state (for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the big hit is set as a continuous numerical range with 1020 as the big hit reference value regardless of whether it is the normal state or the probability variation state),
The number of the special state determination values is the same number regardless of whether the set value is set by the setting means and the normal state or the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22). In the numerical range of the small hit determination value, in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 and 1020 to 1674 which is the numerical range of the big hit determination value when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If the variation special figure is the first special symbol, regardless of whether the setting value or the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, 32767-33094 is a continuous numerical value range with 32767 as the small hit reference value. Is set as, if the variation special figure is the second special symbol, regardless of whether the set value or the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state, 32767 is always set. Continuous portion which is configured as a numerical range of 3,267 to 33,421 as Koatari reference value),
The number of the special state determination values is the same regardless of the set value set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the numerical range of the small hit is the variation special value). If is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value to be set, 32767-33094 is always set as a continuous numerical value range with 32767 as the small hit reference value, and the variation special symbol is the second special symbol. For example, regardless of the set value to be set, a portion which is always set as a continuous numerical value range of 3267 to 33421 with 32767 as the small hit reference value),
When performing the variable display of the first identification information, the special state determination means determines whether to control the special state with a first special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information (for example, , As shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, whether to control the small hit game state with 328 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value When performing the variable display of the second identification information, it is determined whether or not the special state is controlled by the second special state determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (for example, As shown in FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, when the variation special figure is the first special symbol, whether to control the small hitting gaming state with the 655 judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hitting judgment value Part that determines whether),
Although the number of the first special state determination value and the number of the second special state determination value are different, a setting that has the highest probability of being controlled to the advantageous state so that the numerical range is continuous from the common second reference value. It is set to a range different from the range of the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the special state in the value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, it is small. The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, and when the variation special figure is the second special symbol, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 655, The numerical range of the small hit judgment value is 32767 in a range different from the numerical range of 1020 to 1346 which is the numerical range of the big hit judgment value in the probability variation state when 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a small hit standard value By the way, when the variable special figure is the first special symbol, it is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33094, and when the variable special figure is the second special symbol, it is set to the numerical range of 32767 to 33421. )
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state.
In particular, since the numerical range of the special state determination value is not affected by the numerical range of the advantageous state determination value that changes according to the set value to be set, the special state determination means is Accordingly, the numerical range of the special state determination value can always be specified within the same range, so that the processing load for determining whether to control the special state can be reduced.
Further, for example, when the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state judgment value are provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the judgment random number value generated by the judgment random number generating means is advantageous. While it is necessary to perform a plurality of determinations based on each numerical value range of the state determination value for controlling the advantageous state, in the present invention, the first common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value are used. And are set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value, the advantageous state determination means is configured to determine the first determination value of the determination random number value and the advantageous state determination value generated by the determination random number value generation means. Since it is necessary to perform only one determination based on the continuous numerical value range including the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, it is possible to determine whether or not to control to the advantageous state. The processing load to perform can be reduced .
Further, for example, when the common numerical value range of the special state judgment value is provided over a plurality of numerical value ranges, the numerical value ranges of the judgment random number value and the special state judgment value generated by the judgment random number value generation means On the other hand, it is necessary to determine whether or not to control the special state based on a plurality of times, while in the present invention, the common numerical range of the special state determination value is set to be a continuous numerical range from the second reference value. Therefore, the special state determination means determines whether or not to control the advantageous state based on the random number value for determination generated by the random number value generation means for determination and the common numerical value range of the special state determination value. Since it only has to be executed once, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.
Further, for example, whether the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value (the determination random number value is the advantageous state determination value When it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the advantageous state determination value becomes the predetermined reference value, The state determination means determines whether or not to control to the advantageous state only by specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value that is not the predetermined reference value depending on whether it is the normal state or the special state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state.
Further, for example, whether the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination is a value between the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value (the random number value for determination is the special state determination value). When it is determined that the special state is controlled based on whether or not the value is within the numerical value range of 1), one of the minimum value and the maximum value of the special state determination value becomes the second reference value. Since the special state determination means can determine whether to control the special state by only specifying the one of the minimum value and the maximum value which is not the second reference value according to the variation special map, It is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means A20 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A19,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantage state determining means determining to control to the advantage state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
In the predetermined numerical value range, the advantageous state determination value is a first common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common big hit determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). Numeric range) is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a predetermined common numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range that is not set by the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). It is set to include a value (a non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is a range up to a value corresponding to a value (a value of 2 to 6 excluding 1)),
The first common numerical value range is set to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the setting value is 2, 1020 is set as the big hit reference value. The range from 1020 to 1253 which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value is set as a continuous numerical value range),
The non-common numerical range is set so as to be a numerical range continuous from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the first common numerical range (for example, FIG. 45 and FIG. As shown in 46, in the case where the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value with 60000 as a reference value),
The special state determination value is irrespective of the setting value set by the setting means, in the range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, the first reference value and the specific reference value. The same number is set so as to be a continuous second common numerical value range from a second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the numerical range of the small hit determination value is a big hit. In a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the determination value, regardless of the set value that is set, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094, If the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state. Particularly, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether to control the special state.

The gaming machine of means A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A19,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled into an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) and a special state that is more disadvantageous for the player than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit gaming state) And
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 31). Part to be executed)
Random value generation means for determination (for example, random number circuit 104 or game control counter setting unit) capable of generating a random number value for determination for determining whether to control to the advantageous state and whether to control to the special state 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
Whether to control the special state based on the random number for determination generated by the random number generating means for determination and the special state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means With special state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 39),
It is possible to control to the advantageous state based on the advantage state determining means determining to control to the advantage state, and the special state based on the special state determining means to determine to control to the special state. With controllable game control means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6),
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
As the advantageous state determination value, in a predetermined numerical value range, a first common numerical value range that is common to each setting value that can be set by the setting means (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value that is a range of 1020 to 1237). And a non-common big hit determination value that is a range from a non-common numerical value range (for example, 1238 to a value corresponding to each set value (1 to 6 values)) that can be set by the setting means. Numeric range) and are set,
The common numerical value range is set so as to be a numerical value range continuous from the first reference value (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, when the setting value is 2, 1020 is set as the jackpot reference value, The part up to 1253 which is the maximum value of the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value is set as a continuous numerical value range),
The non-common numerical range is set to be a numerical range continuous from a specific reference value different from the first reference value in a range different from the common numerical range (for example, in FIGS. 45 and 46). As shown, when the set value is 2 to 6, the range from 60000 to a value corresponding to the set value is set as the non-common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value, with 60000 as the reference value),
The special state determination value is the first reference value and the specific reference value in a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range of the advantageous state determination value, regardless of the setting value set by the setting means. The same number is set so as to be a continuous common numerical value range from the second reference value different from (for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the large hit judgment value. In a range different from the common numerical value range and the non-common numerical value range, regardless of the set value being set, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, it is always set to the range of 32767 to 33094, If the figure is the second special symbol, the part that is always set in the range of 3267 to 33421)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether to control in the advantageous state and the processing load for determining whether to control in the special state. Particularly, in the present invention, since it is always determined whether or not to control the special state based on the same numerical range of the small hit determination value, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control the special state. In addition, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the process of determining whether to control the special state.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, CPU 120 for production control) for controlling production based on the command output from the game control means,
Extraction means (for example, S101 in FIG. 6) for extracting random number values (for example, MR1 to MR3),
The game control means,
Variable display can be executed based on the random number value extracted from the extraction means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6),
A specific command (for example, random value transmission commands 1 to 4) that processes the random number value (for example, Step Sc031 in FIG. 49) is output to the effect control means (for example, Step Sc032 in FIG. 49, S27 in FIG. 4). ),
The effect control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and an effect corresponding to variable display based on the restored random number value ( For example, the pre-reading notice effect is controlled (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means.

The gaming machine of means B2 is the gaming machine described in means B1,
The specific command is a command (for example, commands 1 to 4 for transmitting random number values) for specifying a variable display pattern for executing variable display by prefetching.
With such a configuration, the variable display pattern is specified by the pre-reading on the sub side as the effect control means without determining the pre-reading of the variable display pattern on the main side. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side. it can.

The gaming machine of means B3 is the gaming machine described in means B1 or means B2,
The specific command is a command configured by converting the random number value extracted from the extracting means from a decimal number to a hexadecimal number and dividing the converted value into a plurality of commands (for example, FIG. 11-3),
The game control means collectively outputs the plurality of commands (for example, step Sc032 of FIG. 49 and S27 of FIG. 4).
According to such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side as the effect control means by outputting a plurality of commands at once, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of means B4 is the gaming machine described in means B3,
The effect control means restores the random number value by analyzing the plurality of commands in a predetermined order (for example, FIG. 11-3) (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50),
A storage unit (for example, step Sc048 in FIG. 50) for storing the variable display pattern command based on the restored random number value is further provided.
With such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by using the variable display pattern command based on the random number value restored on the sub side, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side. ..

The gaming machine of means B5 is the gaming machine described in any of means B2 to B4,
The game control means outputs a division command (for example, a variation pattern distribution state designation command) capable of specifying a division of the variable display pattern (for example, a variation pattern table category) to the effect control means (for example, FIG. 49). Step Sc022, Step Sc023, and S27 of FIG. 4).
With such a configuration, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by outputting the partition command that can specify the partition of the variable display pattern, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of means B6 is the gaming machine described in any of means B2 to B5,
The game control means, an advantageous state command (for example, a symbol designation command) capable of specifying whether or not to control the advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit game state) as a command different from the specific command. It outputs to the effect control means (for example, step Sc027, step Sc029, step Sc030 in FIG. 49).
With such a configuration, the information regarding the most important result of the hit or miss is specified on the main side and output to the sub side, so that it is possible to enhance the safety. Further, since the variable display pattern is specified on the sub side by transmitting the advantageous state command, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of means B7 is the gaming machine described in means B5 or means B6,
The effect control means sets a table for determining a variable display pattern based on the classification command and the advantageous state command (for example, step Sc045, step Sc047 in FIG. 50), and the set table. Based on the restored random number value, the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled (for example, step Sc048 in FIG. 50, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
With such a configuration, since the effect corresponding to the variable display is controlled from the table set based on the classification command and the advantageous state command and the restored random number value, the pressure on the capacity on the main side is reduced. can do.

The gaming machine of means B8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7,
As the effect corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect related to the variable display that triggered the transmission of the specific command is executed (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51).
With such a configuration, since the look-ahead effect related to the variable display is executed by specifying the variable display pattern on the sub side, it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side.

The gaming machine of means C1
When a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state), and the identification is performed as the variable display display result. When a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the display result is derived and displayed, the gaming machine can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state,
A pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage buffer or a second pending storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding variable display as a pending storage;
Based on the pending storage, whether to control to the advantageous state, and the determining means to determine whether to control to the special state (for example, the CPU103 part to execute the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 6),
Flag information setting means (for example, CPU 103) that sets predetermined flag information according to the determination result by the determination means,
And an execution unit (for example, the CPU 103) that executes a predetermined process according to the determination result of the determination unit,
The flag information setting means sets flag information indicating that the advantageous state is controlled and flag information indicating that the special state is controlled in a common flag storage area (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. Portion for executing the processing of steps S557E, 557F, and 557C shown in FIG.
The execution means performs a predetermined process based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557G shown in FIG. 52). .
According to this feature, the number of LD commands and the like can be reduced as compared with the case where the flag information indicating that the flag is controlled to the advantageous state and the flag information indicating that the flag is controlled to the special state are set separately. It is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side as the control means.

The gaming machine of means C2 is the gaming machine of means C1,
The flag information setting means does not simultaneously set the flag information indicating that the advantageous state is controlled and the flag information indicating that the special state is controlled (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S557E and 557F shown in FIG. 52). , 557C).
According to this feature, the flag information indicating that the advantageous state is controlled and the flag information indicating that the special state is controlled are set in the same common flag storage area, so that both are set at the same time. Things can't happen. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the risk of bugs in the gaming machine and risk of goto.

Further, the gaming machine of the means C3 is the gaming machine of the means C1 or the means C2,
On the basis of the determination result by the determining means, information about the symbol to be derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display is stored in the common symbol storage area regardless of the type of the symbol, for example, the symbol information storing means (for example, CPU 103 in FIG. (A part that executes the process of step S557G shown).
According to this feature, since the information about the symbols is also stored in the common symbol storage area, the LD command and the like can be reduced as compared with the case where the symbols are stored separately, so that the capacity of the main side as the game control means is compressed. Can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine of means C4 is one of the means C1 to C3,
Prior to the determination by the determination means, determination means for determining whether to control the advantageous state and whether to control the special state based on the pending storage (for example, the CPU 103 has a start winning prize shown in FIG. 6). (The part that executes the judgment process)
The flag information setting means does not set flag information based on the determination result of the determination means in the common flag storage area.
According to this feature, the flag information based on the determination result (for example, the pre-reading result) by the determination unit is not set in the common flag storage area, so that the risk of a bug or irregularity of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Further, the gaming machine of means C5 is one of the means C1 to C4,
The flag information setting unit erases the flag information set in the common flag storage area before the determination by the determination unit is performed (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the process of step S557A shown in FIG. 52). .
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the risk that an unintended value is set in the common flag storage area.

Further, the gaming machine of means C6 is any one of the means C1 to C5,
The determining means is
After determining whether to control the advantageous state, determine whether to control the special state,
When it is determined that the control is performed in the advantageous state, it is not determined whether or not the control is performed in the special state (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S557B and 557D shown in FIG. 52).
According to this feature, when it is determined that the control is performed in the advantageous state, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the control is performed in the special state, so that the program can be compressed.

Further, the gaming machine of means C7 is the gaming machine of any of means C1 to C6,
When the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, based on the flag information set in the common flag storage area, updating means for updating the state related to the game (for example, special symbol stop in step S113 shown in FIG. 6). In the process, based on the judgment whether the result of the variable display is a big hit or a small hit, the game state is updated (for example, a big hit game or a small hit game is started, or a time saving state or a probability variation state is ended. ), The CPU 103 has a portion for referencing the common buffer at this time).
According to this feature, the flag information set in the common flag storage area can be used to update the state relating to the game (that is, it can be used for other processing) as well, thereby enhancing the compression effect of the capacity on the main side. It becomes possible.

Further, the gaming machine of means C8 is one of the means C1 to C7,
It is possible to perform variable display and control to the advantageous state, and it is also possible to control to the advantageous state based on the fact that the game medium has passed a specific area while being controlled to the special state (for example, 1 type 2 Game machine with various specs),
It is possible to set to any one of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different as a display result of the variable display depending on which the set value is, while the ratio controlled to the special state is the same regardless of which the set value is. (For example, the big hit probability differs depending on the set value, but the small hit probability is the same).
According to this feature, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game even if the game machine is likely to have a disadvantage (low setting) in the set value. Further, even if the frequency of control to the special state is high, it is not necessary to LD (load) the small hit flag different from the big hit flag each time, so it is possible to reduce the number of LD instructions and the like. The pressure on the capacity can be reduced.

The gaming machine described in Means D1
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling production based on the command output from the game control means,
Extraction means (for example, S101 in FIG. 6) for extracting random number values (for example, MR1 to MR3),
The game control means,
Variable display can be executed based on the random number value extracted from the extraction means (for example, S112 in FIG. 6),
A specific command (for example, random number value transmission commands 1 to 4) that processes the random number value (for example, step Sc031 in FIG. 49) is output to the effect control means (for example, step Sc032 in FIG. 49, S27 in FIG. 5). ),
First processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value,
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value,
A third process that is executed before the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process (for example, timer update in FIG. 53). A third processing execution means (for example, the CPU 103) for executing processing),
The effect control means restores the random number value from the specific command output from the game control means (for example, step Sc042 in FIG. 50), and an effect corresponding to variable display based on the restored random number value ( For example, by controlling the look-ahead notice effect (for example, step Sc066 in FIG. 51),
The first process execution means executes the first process based on the information on the timer value updated in the third process,
The second processing execution means executes the second processing based on the information on the timer value updated in the third processing.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means.

In addition, the game machine of means D2,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
At least a plurality of setting values including an advantageous setting value and an unfavorable setting value having different probabilities of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, from 1 which is the most unfavorable setting value to the player to the most advantageous setting value to the player). A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 31) capable of setting any of the set values (up to a certain 6).
Determination random number generating means capable of generating a determination random value for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state (for example, the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154),
Whether to control to the advantageous state based on the determination random number value generated by the determination random number generation means and the advantageous state determination value corresponding to the set value set by the setting means Advantageous state determination means for determining (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 39),
With game control means (for example, the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6) that can be controlled to the advantageous state based on the determination that the advantageous state determination means controls the advantageous state,
Equipped with
Since the number of the advantageous state determination values is different according to the set value, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 13 to 22, a big hit depending on the set value being set). Due to the difference in the number of judgment values, the probability of being controlled to the big hit game state is different),
The advantageous state determination value is a common numerical value range common to the setting values of the plurality of stages that can be set by the setting means within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, a common numerical value range of the jackpot determination value which is a range of 1020 to 1237). ) Is set at least,
The advantageous state determination value of the advantageous setting value is a common numerical value range in a predetermined numerical value range, and a non-common numerical value range not set in the advantageous state determination value of the disadvantage setting value (for example, 1238 to each setting). Non-common numerical value range of the jackpot judgment value, which is the range up to the value according to the value) and is set,
The common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set so as to be a continuous numerical range from a predetermined reference value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the numerical range of the big hit is the normal state). ), Which is set as a continuous numerical value range with 1020 as the jackpot reference value).
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state, so it is possible to reduce the pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.
Also, in the gaming machine of means D2,
First processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value,
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value,
A third process that is executed before the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process (for example, timer update in FIG. 53). A third processing execution means (for example, the CPU 103) for executing processing),
The first process execution means executes the first process based on the information on the timer value updated in the third process,
The second processing execution means may further have a feature that the second processing is executed based on the information of the timer value updated in the third processing.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the main side capacity as the game control means.

In addition, the game machine of means D3,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
When a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, an advantageous state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) Portion for executing steps S114 to S117),
When a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, the special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) can be controlled. A special state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120),
Display result determination means (for example, CPU 103) that determines the display result of the variable display by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Which executes steps S59A, S64A, S59B and S64B).
A specific state control unit (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S2207A, S2212A, and S2212A S2207B and S2212B are executed),
The determination value includes a specific determination value (for example, a determination value for jackpot determination) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as a display result of the variable display, and the special display as a display result of the variable display. Includes a special judgment value (for example, a judgment value for small hit judgment) for deciding to display and display the result,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values "1" to "6") having different numbers of the specific determination values (for example, the CPU 103 changes the setting value in FIG. 31). (The part that executes processing)
The number of the special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when being controlled to the non-specific state and when being controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 58-2 and FIG. 58). 58-3)).
According to this feature, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability, and it is possible to reduce the capacity by making the number of special determination values common, so that the pressure on the main side capacity as the game control means is reduced. be able to.
Also, in the gaming machine of means D3,
First processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes first processing (for example, special symbol variation processing of FIG. 56) according to the timer value,
Second processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes the second processing (for example, special symbol stop processing in FIG. 57) according to the timer value,
A third process that is executed before the first process and the second process and updates the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process (for example, timer update in FIG. 53). A third processing execution means (for example, the CPU 103) for executing processing),
The first process execution means executes the first process based on the information on the timer value updated in the third process,
The second processing execution means may further have a feature that the second processing is executed based on the information of the timer value updated in the third processing.
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the pressure on the main side capacity as the game control means.

In addition, the game machine of means D4,
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display). Setting suggestion based on, or a part capable of executing reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, reach announcement based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled, and a setting suggestion. A specific mode (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern),
The predetermined effect execution means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols was started (variable display mode). 5) of the first embodiment, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach announcement lottery, the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined prior to the setting suggestion in step S294. And the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 must be won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed in step S296. , A part that determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in step S301 prior to the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. CPU 120 determines execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach advance notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach advance notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). A portion and the like (see FIG. 59-7 of the first modification) are featured.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect from being inappropriate because the specified effect in the specific mode is executed when the effect state is controlled.
The gaming machine of the means D4 may be applied to the gaming machines of the means D1 to the means D3. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means and appropriately realize the effect regarding the set value.

In addition, the game machine of means D5,
It can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player at different rates depending on the set value (for example, jackpot). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a gaming state),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled;
The specific effect execution means, the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value The specific effect is executed such that the ratio and the ratio are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), (C), and FIGS. 60-2 to 60-3). There is.
According to this feature, since the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, the gaming machine of the means D5 may be applied to the gaming machines of the means D1 to the means D3. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately reduce the pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means and appropriately execute the specific effect regardless of the set value.

Further, the gaming machine of the means D6 is the gaming machine of the means D1,
The third processing execution means updates a plurality of types of timer values (for example, timer values of a special figure variation time timer and a general figure variation time timer) in the third processing.
According to this feature, since compression can be achieved in a plurality of processes, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity on the main side as the game control means.

Further, the gaming machine of means D7 is the gaming machine of means D1 or means D6,
The game control means has a fourth processing execution means (for example, CPU 103) that executes a fourth processing (for example, special symbol process processing of FIG. 54) that can call the first processing and the second processing, respectively. Then
In the fourth processing, the fourth processing execution means updates the specific flag information based on the information on the timer value updated in the third processing (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes step S100 of FIG. 54). ,
The first processing execution means and the second processing execution means can execute different processing depending on whether or not the specific flag information updated in the fourth processing has a predetermined value. It has a feature.
According to this feature, since efficient compression is possible, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main side as the game control means.

  The gaming machine of the means E1 is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is advantageous for the player. Advantageous state control means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes steps S114 to S117) that can be controlled to a state (for example, a big hit game state), and a special display result (for example, a portion different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display) (for example, With a special state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S118 to S120) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a small hit game state) different from the advantageous state when the small hit symbol) is derived and displayed. , A variable display table using the determination values for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination and the determination value for the small hit determination). Display result determining means for determining the result (for example, the portion in which the CPU 103 executes steps S59A, S64A, S59B, and S64B), the non-specific state (for example, the non-probability variation state), and the non-specific state are more easily controlled to be advantageous states. A specific state (for example, a probability change state) and a controllable specific state control means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes steps S2207A, S2212A, S2207B, S2212B) are provided, and the determination value is displayed as a variable display result. A specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for big hit judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result and a special judgment value for deciding to display the special display result as the display result of the variable display. (For example, a determination value for a small hit determination) is included, and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values) with different numbers of specific determination values are included. A setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process of FIG. 31) capable of setting any one of the values “1” to “6”) is provided, and the number of special determination values is It is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (see FIGS. 58-2 and 58-3). . With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

  The gaming machine of the means E1 is the gaming machine described in the means E2, and the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol). And variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel) variable display executing means (for example, CPU 103 steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) and second special symbol process process) (A part that executes the process corresponding to steps S110A to S113A of (step S25B)) and a special state in which the display result of the variable display of the second identification information is a special display result (for example, a small hit pattern) ( For example, the special state control means (for example, the CPU 103 that can control the KT state) performs steps S2208A, S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, 2220A, S2208B, S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, portions for performing the S2220B) and may be configured to include. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the game machine that can be controlled in the special state.

  The gaming machine of the means E3 is the gaming machine described in the means E2, and the special state control means has a first special state (for example, a first KT state) as a special state and an advantage degree higher than the first special state. It may be configured to be controllable to a high second special state (for example, the second KT state). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability in the gaming machine that can be controlled to the second special state.

  The gaming machine of the means E3 is the gaming machine described in the means E2 or the means E3, and executes the special suggestion effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 58-37). A possible special suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step S930 and variable display effect effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step S928 in the effect control CPU 120). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by suggesting the degree of advantage of the special state.

  The gaming machine of the means E5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E4, and the display result of the variable display is a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) and a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). When a variable display in which a predetermined display result different from (for example, a deviating pattern) is derived and displayed is executed, a setting value suggesting effect suggesting a setting value (for example, a setting value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 58-35) is produced. An executable setting value suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion that executes step S930 and variable display effect effect processing (step S172) according to the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step S928 in the effect control CPU 120). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

  The gaming machine of the means E6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means E1 to E5, and the special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C), A special type determination value (for example, the CPU 103 executes steps S67A and S67B) that determines the type of the special state by using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of the special state. ), And the number of special type determination values may be common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-5). With such a configuration, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  The gaming machine of the means E7 is the gaming machine according to any of the means E1 to E6, and the advantageous state control means has a plurality of advantageous states (for example, 16R certainty variation big hit, 9R certainty variation big hit, 6R certainty variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 2R normal big hit) can be controlled, and the type of advantageous state is determined by using an advantageous type determination value (for example, a jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of advantageous state. Advantageous type determination means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes steps S62A and S62B) is provided, and the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-4). Good. With such a configuration, more appropriate game play can be realized.

  The gaming machine of means E8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E7, and is variable by using a variable display mode determination value (for example, a variation pattern determination value) for determining a variable display mode. A variable display mode determining means for determining a display mode (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a process corresponding to step S1703A of the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111A) and step S1703A of the second fluctuation pattern setting process), The number of variable display mode determination values may be the same regardless of the set value (see FIG. 58-9). With such a configuration, more appropriate game play can be realized.

The gaming machine of means F1 is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect in any one of a plurality of effect modes (for example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display). Setting suggestion based on, or a part capable of executing reach announcement based on the pattern PT-8 or PT-9),
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, reach announcement based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled, and a setting suggestion. A specific mode (for example, a setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern),
The predetermined effect execution means, when both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed (for example, a timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols was started (variable display mode). 5) of the first embodiment, the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 2, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach announcement lottery, the execution of the reach announcement (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined prior to the setting suggestion in step S294. And the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 must be won even if the setting suggestion lottery is executed in step S296. , A part that determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in step S301 prior to the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. CPU 120 determines execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach advance notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach advance notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). Part, etc. (see FIG. 59-7 of the first modification))
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the effect from being inappropriate because the specified effect in the specific mode is executed when the effect state is controlled.

The gaming machine of means F2 is the gaming machine described in means F1,
The special mode includes a first special mode (for example, reach warning (low)) and a second special mode (for example, reach warning) that suggests that the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first special mode. (High)) and
The predetermined effect execution means,
When both the predetermined effect of the second special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode are executable, the predetermined effect of the second special mode is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, If the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach announcement lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the reach announcement based on the pattern PT-9 in step S294. (A part that determines the execution of (high) with priority over a setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special mode. (For example, if the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, step S298. In (1), the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is determined with priority over the reach announcement (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect in the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means F3 is the gaming machine described in means F1 or means F2,
The specific aspect includes a first specific aspect (e.g., setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (e.g., setting suggestion (high) that provides a suggestion regarding setting of a setting value having a higher degree of advantage than the first specific aspect. )) And
The predetermined effect execution means,
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, If the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the pattern is generated in step S298. (A part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of PT-5 to PT-7 prior to the reach announcement (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach announcement lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 59-2 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is obtained in step S301. Part that determines the execution of the reach announcement (low) based on the priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined special effect.

The gaming machine of means F4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F3,
A motion stimulus notification means capable of executing a motion stimulus notification urging the player to perform a motion (for example, the effect control CPU 120 provides an operation stimulating effect that urges the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B). Executable part),
A motion detection unit (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific motion by the player (for example, a motion for operating the push button 31B) regardless of whether or not the motion promotion notification by the motion promotion notification unit is executed. When,
Equipped with
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific motion by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B). When the specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation prompting image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform an effect of changing to the image Z2 (destroying and dropping the paraglider. Modification)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, the player who knows the specific action can execute the predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific action, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means F5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F4,
The predetermined effect is a common effect period in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special mode or the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed (for example, a reach announcement or a setting suggestion). Regardless of whether or not there is a common effect period during which an effect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed), the predetermined aspect of the special aspect A non-common effect period during which it is possible to specify which of the effect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, it is possible to specify which of the reach announcement and the setting suggestion, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern). And a non-common effect period during which an effect of moving to the lower side of the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 59-5).
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, by having the common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the special effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed, so that the game is played. The interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means F6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F5,
The predetermined effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect in a special mode that is a suggestion that the advantageous state will be controlled and is also a suggestion regarding the setting (for example, both reach announcement and setting suggestion can be performed. Sometimes, a specific image that suggests both the big hit and the maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which the paraglider in which the character appears moves while the image Z1 of the paraglider is displayed) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined mode of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode will be executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of means G1 is
It can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3 or set values 1 to 6), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player at different rates depending on the set value (for example, jackpot). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a gaming state),
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, notice X, notice Y, notice Z, etc.) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled;
The specific effect execution means, the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is a first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is a second set value different from the first set value The specific effect is executed such that the rate and the ratio are within the same or substantially the same range (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B) and (C), FIGS. 60-2 to 60-3).
According to such a configuration, the specific effect can be executed with a common appearance rate regardless of the set value, so that the interest of the game is improved.

The gaming machine of means G2 is the gaming machine described in means G1,
The specific effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the specific effect when not controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (B), (C), FIG. 60-2, and FIG. 60). -4) may be performed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably adjust the appearance rate of the specific effect while maintaining the appearance rate of the specific effect when being controlled to the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means G3 is the gaming machine described in means G1 or means G2,
The specific effect execution means changes the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the advantageous state according to a set value (for example, FIG. 60-1 (B), FIG. 60-2 to FIG. 60-4). You may do it.
With such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect can be adjusted appropriately.

The gaming machine of means G4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G3,
The ratio (for example, reliability) controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed is within the same or substantially the same range regardless of the set value (for example, FIG. 60-1 (B), FIG. 60). -3, FIG. 60-4).
According to such a configuration, it is suggested that the specific effect is executed with the same appearance rate and reliability regardless of the set value, and the advantageous state is controlled, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means G5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the specific effect is executed may change depending on the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-1 (C) and 60-2).
According to such a configuration, the appearance rate of the specific effect is adjusted, but the reliability changes, so that it is possible to provide a game property for estimating the reliability, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means G6 is the gaming machine according to any of means G1 to G5,
There are multiple types of the advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect execution means may change the execution rate of the specific effect depending on the set value for each type of the advantageous state to be controlled (for example, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect that a specific advantageous state is achieved according to the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest is improved. In addition, it is possible to suggest a set value depending on the type of specific effect, which improves the interest.

The gaming machine of means G7 is the gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G6,
There are multiple types of the advantageous states with different degrees of advantage for the player,
The specific effect executing means may not change the execution ratio of the specific effect when controlled to the specific advantageous state regardless of the set value (for example, FIGS. 60-2 to 60-4).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to expect that a specific advantageous state is achieved regardless of the set value by executing the specific effect, and the interest is improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine with the setting function, the setting difference generally refers to the probability of a big hit, and the period (time) until the big hit changes as the probability of a big hit changes. It is used as a word that refers to things. In the case where the performance status of the effect changes due to a change in the probability of a big hit, the word “difference in setting” may also be used for the performance status of the effect.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 5 production display device 11 main board 12 production control board 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values and that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player at different rates according to the set setting values,
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
First processing execution means for executing the first processing according to a timer value,
Second processing executing means for executing the second processing according to the timer value,
Third process execution means that is executed before the first process and the second process and executes a third process for updating the timer value used in the first process and the timer value used in the second process. And
The specific effect executing means, the appearance rate of the specific effect when the set value is the first set value, and the appearance of the specific effect when the set value is the second set value different from the first set value The specific effect is executed so that the rate is within the same or substantially the same range,
The first processing execution means executes the first processing based on the timer value updated in the third processing,
A game machine in which the second processing execution means executes the second processing based on the timer value updated in the third processing.